This paper was converted on www.awesomepapers.org from LaTeX by an anonymous user.
Want to know more? Visit the Converter page.

Deformations of Lie groupoid morphisms

Cristian Camilo Cárdenas
Abstract.

We establish the deformation theory of Lie groupoid morphisms, describe the corresponding deformation cohomology of morphisms, and show the properties of the cohomology. We prove its invariance under isomorphisms of morphisms. Additionally, we establish stability properties of the morphisms using Moser-type arguments. Furthermore, we demonstrate the Morita invariance of the deformation cohomology and consider simultaneous deformations of the morphism, its domain, and codomain. These simultaneous deformations are utilized to define cohomology for generalized morphisms and to study deformations of multiplicative forms on Lie groupoids.

1. Introduction

Deformation theory constitutes a distinct research area in mathematics, with numerous noteworthy works emerging in connection with various branches of mathematics and physics such as algebraic geometry, quantum mechanics, complex geometry, and algebra. As defined in Kontsevich’s lectures, deformation theory is the infinitesimal study of moduli spaces. Specifically, it involves the infinitesimal study of families of structures, which we call deformations, around a given structure. This infinitesimal study yields tangent vectors to the moduli spaces, measuring the direction of each family. Typically, these vectors are elements of low degree (1 or 2) for a specific cohomology, known as the deformation cohomology of that structure. Almost every mathematical object possesses its own deformation theory. Examples include Lie algebras, Lie subalgebras, associative algebras, and algebra homomorphisms, each exhibiting a rich deformation theory [38], [21], [35]. Some works in the realm of differential geometry span topics ranging from complex manifolds, foliations, G-structures, and pseudogroup structures to Lie groups, Lie algebroids, and Lie groupoids, among others [28], [1], [22], [26], [25], [3], [2]. Notably, deformations of the latter two Lie objects enable us to address the deformations of many well-known geometric structures, including foliations, Lie groups, Lie group actions, and Poisson structures, as evidenced in [16], [15] and [17]. This is not coincidental; indeed, Lie algebroids and Lie groupoids have recently attracted significant attention for their role in codifying various geometric structures. Moreover, they boast numerous connections with physics-related topics such as symplectic foliations, Poisson structures, Dirac structures, quantization, non-commutative geometry, and more [32], [34], [5], [6], [13], [12].

In general, the philosophy of Deformation Theory asserts that deformation cohomology arises from either a DGLA structure or a LL_{\infty}-algebra structure, as exemplified in [39], [36]. In this context, their Maurer-Cartan elements correspond to structures nearby to the initial structure undergoing deformation. The study of deformations, therefore, allows us to understand the behaviour of structures around a given one.

However, obtaining the algebraic structure on the deformation complex is not always straightforward. This is exemplified well in the case of Lie groups or Lie group homomorphisms [10], where the usual Lie group cohomology is employed to study deformations, but an algebraic structure on this complex remains unknown. The deformation complex of morphisms of Lie groupoids, which we will work in this paper, also falls into this category of having (so far) an unknown algebraic structure on the complex. Nevertheless, we can still use the deformation cohomology to approach the study of nearby structures in an alternative manner. Indeed, in Section 10 we approach the problem of stability under deformations of morphisms which give conditions to understand when any smooth family of Lie groupoid morphisms represents a constant path in the corresponding moduli space. Stable morphisms under deformations are closely related to representing the isolated points on the moduli space of morphisms. For example, one can consider the compact-open topology in the space of morphisms between two Lie groupoids. If this space is locally path-connected around a fixed morphism Φ\Phi then the stability of Φ\Phi under deformations amounts to representing an isolated point in the moduli space. However, despite the known fact that the space of smooth maps between manifolds is locally path-connected under compactness of the domain (See [23], Theorem 1.11, p. 76), the question of whether or not the space of morphisms between two Lie groupoids is locally path-connected is rather subtle, and we leave it to be explored elsewhere. The stability under deformations is then equivalent to stating that Φ\Phi can be deformed only in some trivial ways determined by the conjugation by either bisections or gauge-maps; we will detail these trivial ways and relations between them in Section 3. For instance, we employ the properness of Lie groupoids to verify that the stability under deformations property holds for morphisms as stated in the following result.

Theorem 1.1.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be any morphism of Lie groupoids. If \mathcal{H} is proper and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is a transitive Lie groupoid then any deformation of Φ\Phi is trivial.

In Section 4 we introduce the deformation complex of morphisms which, together with deformations of morphisms, are the main notions we will work in this paper. As in the statement below, we show that naturally isomorphic Lie groupoid morphisms have isomorphic deformation cohomologies. This result establishes the deformation cohomology of morphisms as a key concept within the category of Lie groupoids and equivalence classes of morphisms.

Theorem 1.2.

If Φ\Phi and Ψ\Psi are equivalent morphisms then their deformation cohomologies Hdef(Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Phi) and Hdef(Ψ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi) are isomorphic.

We also provide an alternative description of the complex using the theory of VBVB-groupoids and their cohomology [24]. In Section 5 we illustrate the deformation complex with examples and explore its relation to other complexes. In Section 8 we use the exactness of 1-cocycles associated to a deformation of morphisms to characterize the trivial deformations of morphisms:

Theorem 1.3.

A deformation by morphisms Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial if and only if the family XεCdef1(Φε)X_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) of associated cocycles is smoothly exact.

Such deformation 1-cocycles should be conceived as the velocity vectors of the deformation and their exactness as the vanishing of their velocities. Still in Section 8, we conduct a similar analysis by considering other types of relations between the morphisms that determine the respective coarse moduli spaces of morphisms. We use the associated 1-cocycles to characterize the trivial deformations in each of these moduli spaces and that arise naturally when observing the deformation complex. For instance, we consider the relation induced by the composition action of the full group of automorphisms of the codomain Lie groupoid. A morphism Φ\Phi can then be deformed by composing it with family of such automorphisms, and the family that it produces is said to be a weakly trivial deformation.

In Section 9 we extend results from Section 8 to kk-deformations of morphisms. As an application, we obtain a more geometric proof of the Thom-Levine Theorem, which characterizes the triviality of kk-deformations of smooth maps between manifolds ([23], Theorem 3.3, p. 124).

The Thom-Levine Theorem is crucial in the study of stability of smooth maps and provides an intermediate step in establishing the equivalence between stability and infinitesimal stability of smooth maps. It plays a key role in verifying that infinitesimal stability implies stability under deformations. This, in turn, is used to prove stability under the compactness hypothesis on the domain, ensuring that any map close to a fixed one can be reached by a deformation (path) which, at each time ε{\varepsilon}, is locally trivial.

In Sections 6 and 7, using the VBVB-cohomology description of the deformation complex, we establish additional results to enhance our understanding of the behaviour of the deformation cohomology. These results are aplicable more generally to any VBVB-groupoid Γ\Gamma over a base 𝒢M\mathcal{G}\rightrightarrows M. For instance, if :CE\partial:C\rightarrow E is the complex of vector bundles over MM induced by Γ\Gamma (where CC is the core and EE the side bundles of Γ\Gamma) with 𝔨=Ker{\mathfrak{k}}=\mathrm{Ker}\>\partial and 𝔩=Coker{\mathfrak{l}}=\mathrm{Coker}\>\partial then we show that there exists an exact sequence for the low-degree cohomology as follows:

Proposition 1.4.
0H1(𝒢,𝔨)rHVB1(𝒢,Γ)πΓ(𝔩)invKH2(𝒢,𝔨)HVB2(𝒢,Γ).0\rightarrow H^{1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\rightarrow}}H^{1}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\rightarrow}}\Gamma(\mathfrak{l})^{inv}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\rightarrow}}H^{2}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\rightarrow H^{2}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma).

Additionally, we verify that the previous sequence can be extended in the particular case of regular groupoids, indeed if Γ\Gamma is a regular VBVB-groupoid

Theorem 1.5.

There exists a map K:H(𝒢,𝔩)H+2(𝒢,𝔨)K:H^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{l}})\longrightarrow H^{\bullet+2}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}) such that the cohomology HVB(𝒢,Γ)H^{*}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma) associated to Γ\Gamma fits into a long exact sequence

Hk(𝒢,𝔨)rHVBk(𝒢,Γ)πHk1(𝒢,𝔩)KHk+1(𝒢,𝔨)\cdots\longrightarrow H^{k}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k+1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\longrightarrow\cdots

This VBVB-cohomology approach gives us a way to make explicit the deformation cohomology groups of a morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\to\mathcal{G} under the properness condition of its domain.

Proposition 1.6.

If {\mathcal{H}} is proper, then Hdef0(Φ)Γ(ϕi𝒢)invH^{0}_{def}(\Phi)\cong\Gamma(\phi^{*}i_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv}, Hdef1(Φ)Γ(ϕν𝒢)invH^{1}_{def}(\Phi)\cong\Gamma(\phi^{*}\nu_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv} and Hdefk(Φ)=0H^{k}_{def}(\Phi)=0 for every k>1k>1, where 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}} and ν𝒢\nu_{\mathcal{G}} are the isotropy bundle of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and the normal bundle to the orbits of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, respectively.

We consider more properties of the complex in Section 12 where we establish a Morita invariance of the complex. We use this invariance, combined with simultaneous deformations of morphisms, their domains, and codomains (detailed in Section 11) to derive as an application a deformation cohomology for generalized morphisms. In essence, we introduce a deformation complex Cdef(Ψ/Φ)C^{*}_{def}(\Psi/\Phi) for fractions Ψ/Φ:𝒢\Psi/\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} between morphisms of groupoids, and verify that such a cohomology is invariant under equivalence of fractions:

Theorem 1.7.

If Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi and Ψ/Φ\Psi^{\prime}/\Phi^{\prime} are equivalent fractions, then their deformation cohomologies Hdef(Ψ/Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi/\Phi) and Hdef(Ψ/Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi^{\prime}/\Phi^{\prime}) are isomorphic.

Thus, this result yields a well-defined algebraic object associated to generalized morphisms or maps between differentiable stacks. The use of this complex in the study of deformations of fractions will be explored in future work. The study of deformations of Lie subgroupoids, which is explored in detail in [9], is also motivated by the work on simultaneous deformations, where the deformation complexes are obtained through the cohomological construction of the mapping-cone complex. As a final application, in Section 13 we introduce the study of deformation of multiplicative forms on Lie groupoids. There, we define the deformation complex for multiplicative forms and characterize the trivial deformations in terms of the exactness of the associated cocycles in the complex, which can be thought of as a Moser’s type Theorem for multiplicative forms. This topic is deeply explored in [8] for studying deformations of symplectic groupoids.

Acknowledgements

I would like to thank to Ivan Struchiner for many valuable discussions, important advice as well as for suggestions, and comments on initial drafts of this paper. Special thanks to Joao Nuno Mestre for valuable suggestions on the first versions of this paper. This work was also benefited by conversations with Cristian Ortiz and Matias del Hoyo, which improved the final version of this paper. This research received support from a PNPD postdoctoral fellowship at UFF.

2. Background: Deformation Theory of Lie Groupoids and VB-Groupoids

In this section we will recall some preliminary content that will be used throughout the paper. Its purpose is mostly to establish notations and to maintain this paper as self-contained as possible. For further details on Lie groupoids, Lie algebroids, deformation theory of Lie groupoids and VB-groupoids, we refer the reader to [32], [15] and [24].

Let 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M be a Lie groupoid, denote by ss, tt, mm, ii and uu the source, target, multiplication, inversion and unit of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, respectively. We will write m(g,h)=ghm(g,h)=gh and i(g)=g1i(g)=g^{-1} when the context is clear, and identify xMx\in M with the corresponding unity u(x)𝒢u(x)\in{\mathcal{G}}. For g𝒢g\in{\mathcal{G}}, we write g:xyg:x\rightarrow y meaning s(g)=xs(g)=x and t(g)=yt(g)=y.

If g:xyg:x\rightarrow y, there is a right translation

Rg:s1(y)s1(x),Rg(h)=hg;R_{g}:s^{-1}(y)\rightarrow s^{-1}(x),\ R_{g}(h)=hg;

and analogously a left-translation Lg:t1(x)t1(y),L_{g}:t^{-1}(x)\rightarrow t^{-1}(y), Lg(h)=ghL_{g}(h)=gh, between the tt-fibers. We denote their differentials, respectively, by rgr_{g} and lgl_{g}. With this, X𝔛(𝒢)X\in\mathfrak{X}({\mathcal{G}}) is a right-invariant vector field if ds(Xg)=0ds(X_{g})=0 and Xgh=rh(Xg)X_{gh}=r_{h}(X_{g}) for all (g,h)𝒢(2)(g,h)\in{\mathcal{G}}^{(2)}. Observe that the subset of right-invariant vector fields 𝔛r(𝒢)𝔛(𝒢)\mathfrak{X}^{r}({\mathcal{G}})\subset\mathfrak{X}({\mathcal{G}}) has a C(M)C^{\infty}(M)-module structure given by fX:=(tf)Xf\cdot X:=(t^{*}f)X. Further, 𝔛r(𝒢)𝔛(𝒢)\mathfrak{X}^{r}({\mathcal{G}})\subset\mathfrak{X}({\mathcal{G}}) is a Lie subalgebra with the usual Lie bracket on vector fields.

Just as a Lie group GG has an associated Lie algebra 𝔤\mathfrak{g}, Lie groupoids also can be studied infinitesimally giving rise to the notion of Lie algebroid. The Lie algebroid A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is determined (like 𝔤\mathfrak{g}) by the Lie algebra of right-invariant vector fields on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. More precisely, A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} is the vector bundle (Ts𝒢)|M\left.(T^{s}{\mathcal{G}})\right|_{M} over MM, where Ts𝒢:=Ker(ds:T𝒢sTM)T^{s}{\mathcal{G}}:=Ker(ds:T{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow s^{*}TM) and M𝒢M\subset{\mathcal{G}} is viewed inside 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} as the units. In this way, there is a map Γ(A𝒢)𝔛r(𝒢),αα:grg(αt(g)),\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}})\longrightarrow\mathfrak{X}^{r}({\mathcal{G}}),\ \alpha\longmapsto\vec{\alpha}:g\mapsto r_{g}(\alpha_{t(g)}), which is easily seen to be an isomorphism of C(M)C^{\infty}(M)-modules inducing then a Lie bracket on Γ(A𝒢)\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}). The vector field α\vec{\alpha} is called the right-invariant vector field associated to α\alpha. The vector bundle A𝒢A_{{\mathcal{G}}} is also equipped with a vector bundle map ρ:A𝒢TM\rho:A_{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow TM given by the restriction of dt:T𝒢TMdt:T{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow TM to A𝒢T𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}}\subset T{\mathcal{G}}. The map ρ\rho is called the anchor map of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}}.

In other words, the Lie algebroid associated to 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} consists of the pair (A𝒢,ρ)(A_{\mathcal{G}},\rho) together with the Lie bracket on sections of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}}, induced from that of 𝔛r(𝒢)\mathfrak{X}^{r}({\mathcal{G}}). With this point of view, we can abstract such a notion of Lie algebroid and to say that a vector bundle AA over MM is a Lie algebroid if there exist a vector-bundle map ρ:ATM\rho:A\longrightarrow TM together with a Lie bracket on the sections of AA in such a way that a Leibniz rule is satisfied:

[α,fβ]Γ(A)=f[α,β]+Lρ(α)(f)β,[\alpha,f\beta]_{\Gamma(A)}=f[\alpha,\beta]+L_{\rho(\alpha)}(f)\cdot\beta,

for every α,βΓ(A)\alpha,\beta\in\Gamma(A) and fC(M)f\in C^{\infty}(M). As the reader may expect, A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} defined as above is an example of a Lie algebroid in this more abstract context. More examples can be found in [34] and [32].

2.1. Deformation theory of Lie Groupoids

The deformation theory of Lie groupoids was recently introduced in [15]. In there, the authors developed the main aspects of the theory; among other things, they exhibite the corresponding cohomology attached to deformations of Lie groupoids and use it to prove the stability of compact Lie groupoids. We recall here some key facts of the constructions in [15].

Deformations of Lie groupoids

A deformation of a manifold is roughtly understood in terms of a smooth family of manifolds. A smooth family of manifolds {Mε|εI}\{\left.M_{\varepsilon}\right|{\varepsilon}\in I\} is viewed as a manifold M~\tilde{M} together with a submersion π~:M~I\tilde{\pi}:\tilde{M}\longrightarrow I, such that every MεM_{\varepsilon} is the fiber π1(ε)\pi^{-1}({\varepsilon}) over ε{\varepsilon}. One also says that the family {Mε|εI}\{\left.M_{\varepsilon}\right|{\varepsilon}\in I\} is smoothly parametrized by II. This notion is the central idea to define deformations of Lie groupoids. Explicitly,

Definition 2.1.

(Smooth family of Lie groupoids)
A smooth family of Lie groupoids parametrized by a manifold BB is given by a Lie groupoid 𝒢~M~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M} and a surjective submersion π\pi such that πs~=πt~\pi\circ\tilde{s}=\pi\circ\tilde{t}

𝒢~M~πB.\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\rightarrow}}B.

In this way, π\pi determines the family of Lie groupoids {𝒢b|bB}\{\left.{\mathcal{G}}_{b}\right|b\in B\}, where 𝒢b{\mathcal{G}}_{b} denotes the restricted groupoid over Mb=π1(b)M_{b}=\pi^{-1}(b). One says that the family is proper if 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} is proper, i.e., if s~×t~:𝒢~M~×M~\tilde{s}\times\tilde{t}:\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\longrightarrow\tilde{M}\times\tilde{M} is a proper map.
Two familes 𝒢~M~πB\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\rightarrow}}B and 𝒢~M~πB\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M}^{\prime}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi^{\prime}}}{{\rightarrow}}B are isomorphic if there exists an isomorphism of groupoids (F,f):𝒢~𝒢~(F,f):\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightarrow\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime} compatible with the submersions π\pi and π\pi^{\prime} in the sense that πf=π\pi^{\prime}\circ f=\pi. This isomorphism FF can be thought of as a smooth family of isomorphisms Fb:𝒢b𝒢bF_{b}:{\mathcal{G}}_{b}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}_{b} parametrized by BB.

Definition 2.2.

(Deformation of Lie groupoids)
Let 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M be a Lie groupoid with structural maps s,t,m,i,u.s,\ t,\ m,\ i,\ u. A deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is a smooth family of Lie groupoids 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} parametrized by an open interval II containing zero,

𝒢~={𝒢εMε:εI}\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}=\{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}\rightrightarrows M_{\varepsilon}:{\varepsilon}\in I\}

such that 𝒢0=𝒢{\mathcal{G}}_{0}={\mathcal{G}}. We denote the structural maps of 𝒢ε{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon} by sε,tε,mε,iε,uε.s_{\varepsilon},\ t_{\varepsilon},\ m_{\varepsilon},\ i_{\varepsilon},\ u_{\varepsilon}.

The deformation 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is called strict if the all fibers 𝒢ε{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon} and MεM_{\varepsilon} are diffeomorphic to 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and MM in a smooth way, i.e., if there exist two diffeomorphisms F:𝒢~𝒢×IF:\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}}\times I and f:M~M×If:\tilde{M}\rightarrow M\times I such that prIF=πs~pr_{I}\circ F=\pi\circ\tilde{s} and prIf=πpr_{I}\circ f=\pi. In other words, essentially we only deform the structural maps of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}: (𝒢~M~,s~,t~)(𝒢×IM×I,sε×ε,tε×ε)(\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M},\tilde{s},\tilde{t})\cong({\mathcal{G}}\times I\rightrightarrows M\times I,s_{\varepsilon}\times{\varepsilon},t_{\varepsilon}\times{\varepsilon}). In such a case, we can assume 𝒢~=𝒢×I\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}={\mathcal{G}}\times I and the deformation is said to be ss-constant if sεs_{\varepsilon} does not depend on ε{\varepsilon}. The (strict) deformation such that 𝒢ε=𝒢{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}={\mathcal{G}} as groupoids is called the constant deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.
Two deformations 𝒢~={𝒢εMε:εI}\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}=\{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}\rightrightarrows M_{\varepsilon}:{\varepsilon}\in I\} and 𝒢~={𝒢εMε:εI}\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime}=\{{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}\rightrightarrows M^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}:{\varepsilon}\in I^{\prime}\} are locally equivalent if there exist a family of isomorphisms of groupoids Fε:𝒢ε𝒢εF_{\varepsilon}:{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}, smoothly parametrized by ε{\varepsilon} in a open interval containing zero (contained in III\cap I^{\prime}), such that F0=Id𝒢F_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}}.

Remark 2.1.

Consider two locally equivalent deformations 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} and 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime}. For simplicity and because around 𝒢0{\mathcal{G}}_{0} the families 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} and 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime} are isomorphic, we will just say that 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} and 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}^{\prime} are equivalent deformations of 𝒢0{\mathcal{G}}_{0} (even if III\neq I^{\prime}).

With the convention of the last remark, the deformation 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} is called trivial if it is equivalent to the constant deformation.

Remark 2.2 (Fibrations).

Recall that a fibration between two Lie groupoids is a Lie groupoid morphism 𝔉:𝒢\mathfrak{F}:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{H}} such that the map 𝔉!:𝒢×NM\mathfrak{F}^{!}:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{H}}\times_{N}M, g((g),s𝒢(g))g\mapsto(\mathcal{F}(g),s_{{\mathcal{G}}}(g)), is a surjective submersion. As pointed out in [18], a deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} also can be regarded in terms of fibrations of Lie groupoids. The data 𝒢~M~πI\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\rightarrow}}I involved in the definition of a deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} can be expressed in the form

𝔉:(𝒢~M~)(II),\mathfrak{F}:(\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\rightrightarrows\tilde{M})\longrightarrow(I\rightrightarrows I),

where 𝔉\mathfrak{F} is a fibration of Lie groupoids. The family 𝒢ε{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon} of Lie groupoids corresponds to the fibers of the fibration. In this sense, a strict deformation can be thought of as a fibration 𝔉\mathfrak{F} where the maps between the arrows and the objects are locally trivial. In fact, two trivializations F1:𝒢~𝒢×IF_{1}:\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}\times I and F0:M~M×IF_{0}:\tilde{M}\longrightarrow M\times I induce a family of Lie groupoid structures 𝒢ε{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon} on the manifold 𝒢=𝒢~0{\mathcal{G}}=\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}_{0}. For instance, the deformation of the source map is determined by (sε(g),ε)=F0s~F11(g,ε)(s_{\varepsilon}(g),{\varepsilon})=F_{0}\circ\tilde{s}\circ F_{1}^{-1}(g,{\varepsilon}) and so on.

Examples of deformations of Lie groupoids are considered in ([18], p. 16). As a manner of illustration we sketch here some of them.

Examples 2.3.
  1. (1)

    Let G=2G=\mathbb{R}^{2}. Consider the family of Lie groups G×,(g,ε)εG\times\mathbb{R}\longrightarrow\mathbb{R},\ (g,{\varepsilon})\mapsto{\varepsilon} given by

    (x1,y1)ε(x2,y2):=(x1+x2,y1+ex1εy2).(x_{1},y_{1})\cdot_{\varepsilon}(x_{2},y_{2}):=(x_{1}+x_{2},y_{1}+e^{x_{1}{\varepsilon}}y_{2}).

    Due to the fact that for ε0{\varepsilon}\neq 0 the multiplication ε\cdot_{\varepsilon} is non-abelian, this is a non-trivial deformation of GG.

  2. (2)

    Consider the family of Lie group actions of \mathbb{R} on 𝐓2:=2/2\mathbf{T}^{2}:=\mathbb{R}^{2}/\mathbb{Z}^{2}, given by:

    rε(x1,x2):=(x1+r,x2+εr).r\cdot_{\varepsilon}(x_{1},x_{2}):=(x_{1}+r,x_{2}+{\varepsilon}r).

    Thus, if G:=×𝐓2G:=\mathbb{R}\times\mathbf{T}^{2} then such a family of actions can be seen as a family of action groupoids G×G\times\mathbb{R}\longrightarrow\mathbb{R}. This is of course a non-trivial deformation of GG since the topology of the orbits varies with ε{\varepsilon}.

Deformation cohomology of Lie groupoids

The fundamental fact of the deformation complex (Cdef(𝒢),δ𝒢)(C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}),\delta_{{\mathcal{G}}}) of a Lie groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is that it governs deformations of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Concretely, to every deformation of 𝒢\mathcal{G} one associates a cohomology class in Hdef2(𝒢)H^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}), and this correspondence also shows a relation between the equivalence classes of deformations of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and the classes of Hdef2(𝒢)H^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}). The deformation complex of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is defined as follows.

For any kk\in\mathbb{N}, consider 𝒢(k)={(g1,,gk):s(gi)=t(gi+1)}{\mathcal{G}}^{(k)}=\left\{(g_{1},...,g_{k}):s(g_{i})=t(g_{i+1})\right\} the manifold of kk-strings of composable arrows, and define 𝒢(0)=M{\mathcal{G}}^{(0)}=M. The space of kk-cochains Cdefk(𝒢)C^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) is given by

Cdefk(𝒢)={c:𝒢(k)T𝒢|c(g1,,gk)Tg1𝒢 and c is s-projectable},C^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})=\left\{\left.c:{\mathcal{G}}^{(k)}\rightarrow T{\mathcal{G}}\right|\ c(g_{1},...,g_{k})\in T_{g_{1}}{\mathcal{G}}\text{ and }c\text{ is }s\text{-projectable}\right\},

where ss-projectable means that dsc(g1,,gk)=:sc(g2,,gk)ds\circ c(g_{1},...,g_{k})=:s_{c}(g_{2},...,g_{k}) does not depend on g1g_{1}. The differential of cc is defined by

(δc)(g1,,gk+1):\displaystyle(\delta c)(g_{1},...,g_{k+1}): =dm¯(c(g1g2,g3,,gk+1),c(g2,,gk+1))+\displaystyle=-d\bar{m}(c(g_{1}g_{2},g_{3},...,g_{k+1}),c(g_{2},...,g_{k+1}))+
+i=2k(1)ic(g1,gigi+1,,gk+1)+(1)k+1c(g1,,gk),\displaystyle+\sum_{i=2}^{k}(-1)^{i}c(g_{1},...g_{i}g_{i+1},...,g_{k+1})+(-1)^{k+1}c(g_{1},...,g_{k}),

where m¯:𝒢s×s𝒢𝒢\bar{m}:{\mathcal{G}}_{s}\times_{s}{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}, m¯(g,h)=gh1\bar{m}(g,h)=gh^{-1} is the division map of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.
For k=0k=0, Cdef0(𝒢):=Γ(A)C^{0}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}):=\Gamma(A) with differential defined by

δα=α+αCdef1(𝒢),\delta\alpha=\overrightarrow{\alpha}+\overleftarrow{\alpha}\in C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}),

where α\overleftarrow{\alpha} is the left-invariant vector field on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} associated to α\alpha defined by α(g):=lg(di(αs(g)))\overleftarrow{\alpha}(g):=l_{g}(di(\alpha_{s(g)})). Note that a section of AA can be viewed as a map c:𝒢(0)T𝒢c:{\mathcal{G}}^{(0)}\longrightarrow T{\mathcal{G}}, with c(1x)T1x𝒢c(1_{x})\in T_{1_{x}}{\mathcal{G}} such that dsc=0ds\circ c=0.
This data in fact defines a cohomology (δ2=0\delta^{2}=0) and Hdef(𝒢)H^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) denotes the deformation cohomology of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

In this way, one can describe explicitly the cohomology class [ξ0]Hdef2(𝒢)[\xi_{0}]\in H^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) associated to an ss-constant deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} by

ξ0(g,h):=ddε|ε=0m¯ε(m0(g,h),h),ξ0Zdef2(𝒢),\xi_{0}(g,h):=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\bar{m}_{{\varepsilon}}(m_{0}(g,h),h),\ \ \xi_{0}\in Z^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}),

where m0m_{0} denotes the multiplication of 𝒢=𝒢0{\mathcal{G}}={\mathcal{G}}_{0}. The fact that ξ0\xi_{0} is a cocycle is implied from applying ddε|ε=0\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0} to the associativity property of m¯ε\bar{m}_{\varepsilon}. The element ξ0\xi_{0} is called the deformation cocycle of the deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. For deformations which are not necessarily ss-constant, a slightly different approach needs to be used yielding a non canonical 2-cocycle, however one does gets a canonical a 2-cohomology class for any deformation in the same equivalence class (see Section 5.4 in [15]).

Of remarkable importance is the transgression of the 2-cocycle ξ0\xi_{0}; when it exists, it plays a key role in the stability under deformations problem of Lie groupoids, as we explain below.

Moser’s argument (towards stability under deformations)

One fundamental step to study the stability question for Lie groupoids is given by the following proposition, which uses the deformation complex to state a result in the same spirit as that of the classical Moser’s theorem of symplectic geometry (see e.g. [33] p. 93).

Proposition 2.4.

[15] Let 𝒢~={𝒢ε:εI}\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}=\left\{{\mathcal{G}}_{{\varepsilon}}:{\varepsilon}\in I\right\} be an ss-constant deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Consider the induced cocycles ξεCdef2(𝒢ε)\xi_{{\varepsilon}}\in C^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}_{{\varepsilon}}), at each time ε{\varepsilon}, defined in analogous way to ξ0\xi_{0} above (ξε=ddλ|λ=0m¯ε+λ(mε(g,h),h))(\xi_{\varepsilon}=\left.\frac{d}{d{\lambda}}\right|_{{\lambda}=0}\bar{m}_{{\varepsilon}+{\lambda}}(m_{\varepsilon}(g,h),h)). Assume that for every ε{\varepsilon} small enough there exists XεCdef1(𝒢ε)X_{{\varepsilon}}\in C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}_{{\varepsilon}}) such that

(1) δε(Xε)=ξε,\delta_{\varepsilon}(X_{{\varepsilon}})=\xi_{{\varepsilon}},

and that the resulting time-dependent vector field X:={Xε}X:=\left\{X_{{\varepsilon}}\right\} on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is smooth. Then, for ε1{\varepsilon}_{1} and ε2{\varepsilon}_{2} close to 0, the time-dependent flow ψXε2,ε1\psi^{{\varepsilon}_{2},{\varepsilon}_{1}}_{X} is a locally defined morphism from 𝒢ε1{\mathcal{G}}_{{\varepsilon}_{1}} to 𝒢ε2{\mathcal{G}}_{{\varepsilon}_{2}} covering the time-dependent flow of V:={Vε:=ds(Xε)}V:=\{V_{{\varepsilon}}:=ds(X_{{\varepsilon}})\} on MM.
Additionally, if 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is proper, ψXε2,ε1(g)\psi^{{\varepsilon}_{2},{\varepsilon}_{1}}_{X}(g) is defined if and only if ψVε2,ε1(s(g))\psi^{{\varepsilon}_{2},{\varepsilon}_{1}}_{V}(s(g)) and ψVε2,ε1(t(g))\psi^{{\varepsilon}_{2},{\varepsilon}_{1}}_{V}(t(g)) are defined.

This proposition tells us the conditions under which one finds a flow compatible with the variations of the structural maps of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. However, by considering the structural maps of the total groupoid 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}, one can express the following equivalent version of the proposition.

Proposition 2.5.

[15] Consider an ss-constant deformation as above. A one-parameter family XεX_{{\varepsilon}} of vector fields on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} satisfies the cocycle equations (1) if and only if the induced vector field on 𝒢~=𝒢×I\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}}={\mathcal{G}}\times I,

X~(g,ε)=(Xε(g),0)+ε𝔛(𝒢×I),\tilde{X}(g,{\varepsilon})=(X_{{\varepsilon}}(g),0)+\frac{\partial}{\partial{\varepsilon}}\in\mathfrak{X}({\mathcal{G}}\times I),

is multiplicative.

In this way, one knows that the flow of X~\tilde{X} (when uniformly defined) is given by automorphisms of 𝒢~\tilde{{\mathcal{G}}} ([31], Prop. 3.5). And the stability under deformations question of Lie groupoids is essentially solved by finding a complete vector field like XX (or X~\tilde{X}) above for every deformation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} ([15], Theorem. 7.1).
Analogous concepts to those described in the three steps above (deformations, cohomology and Moser’s trick) will be developed when working with the deformation theory of Lie groupoid morphisms in this paper.

We introduce now some notions of the theory of VB-groupoids which will serve us to obtain alternative descriptions and give a treatment of the deformation complex of morphisms which we will work with.

2.2. Interlude on VB-groupoids

VB-groupoids

A VB-groupoid can be thought of as a groupoid object in the category of vector bundles. They provide alternative ways to look at the representation theory and the deformation theory of Lie groupoids. For instance, the deformation complex of Lie groupoids (Subsection 2.1) can be seen as the VB-complex which is naturally associated to the cotangent groupoid when regarded as a VB-groupoid (See [15], [20] and Remark 2.11 below). This point of view will be useful in the study of the deformation complexes defined in this paper. A more detailed description of the theory of VB-groupoids and VB-complexes can be found in [32], [24] and [4].

Definition 2.3.

A VBVB-groupoid (Γ,E,𝒢,M)(\Gamma,E,{\mathcal{G}},M) is a structure of two Lie groupoids and two vector bundles as in the diagram below

(2) Γ{\Gamma}E{E}𝒢{{\mathcal{G}}}M,{M,}s~\scriptstyle{\tilde{s}}t~\scriptstyle{\tilde{t}}q~\scriptstyle{\tilde{q}}q\scriptstyle{q}s\scriptstyle{s}t\scriptstyle{t}

where the vertical directions are vector bundle structures and the horizontal ones are Lie groupoids, such that the structure maps of the groupoid Γ\Gamma (source, target, identity, multiplication, inversion) are vector bundle morphisms over the corresponding structure maps of the groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

Remark 2.6.

Note that the multiplication mΓ:Γ(2)Γm_{\Gamma}:\Gamma^{(2)}\longrightarrow\Gamma makes sense as a vector bundle morphism when one considers the induced vector bundle structure of Γ(2)\Gamma^{(2)} over 𝒢(2){\mathcal{G}}^{(2)} (guaranteed from the fact that the ‘double source map’ (q~,s~):Γ𝒢s×E(\tilde{q},\tilde{s}):\Gamma\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}\;_{s}\,\times E is a surjective submersion (appendix A in [30]).

In this setting a morphism of VB-groupoids (ΦΓ,ΦE,Φ𝒢,ΦM):(Γ,E,𝒢,M)(Γ,E,𝒢,M)(\Phi_{\Gamma},\Phi_{E},\Phi_{\mathcal{G}},\Phi_{M}):(\Gamma,E,{\mathcal{G}},M)\longrightarrow(\Gamma^{\prime},E^{\prime},{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime},M^{\prime}) is a morphism (ΦΓ,ΦE)(\Phi_{\Gamma},\Phi_{E}) between the Lie groupoids ΓE\Gamma\rightrightarrows E and ΓE\Gamma^{\prime}\rightrightarrows E^{\prime} preserving the vector bundle structures, i.e, such that ΦΓ\Phi_{\Gamma} and ΦE\Phi_{E} are vector bundle morphisms covering the maps Φ𝒢:𝒢𝒢\Phi_{\mathcal{G}}:{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} and ΦM:MM\Phi_{M}:M\longrightarrow M^{\prime}, respectively. Observe that, by restricting ΦΓ\Phi_{\Gamma} to the zero section, Φ𝒢\Phi_{\mathcal{G}} turns out to be a Lie groupoid morphism.

Example 2.7.

(Tangent VB-groupoid) Given a Lie groupoid 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M with source, target and multiplication maps ss, tt and mm, by applying the tangent functor one gets the tangent groupoid T𝒢TMT{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows TM with structure maps TsTs, TtTt, TmTm and so on. This tangent groupoid is further a VB-groupoid over 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M (with respect to the tangent projections).

Remark 2.8.

Note that in the previous example one has the following short exact sequences of vector bundles over 𝒢{\mathcal{G}},

(3) s(A𝒢)lTiT𝒢(Tt)!t(TM)s^{*}(A_{\mathcal{G}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle-l\circ Ti}}{{\longrightarrow}}T{\mathcal{G}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle(Tt)^{!}}}{{\longrightarrow}}t^{*}(TM)

and

(4) t(A𝒢)rT𝒢(Ts)!s(TM)t^{*}(A_{\mathcal{G}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}T{\mathcal{G}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle(Ts)^{!}}}{{\longrightarrow}}s^{*}(TM)

where rr and ll are the right and left multiplication on vectors tangent to the ss-fibers and tt-fibers of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, respectively; and (Ts)!(Ts)^{!} and (Tt)!(Tt)^{!} are the maps induced by TsTs and TtTt with image on the corresponding pullback bundles.

Example 2.9.

(Cotangent groupoid) As noticed in [11], given a Lie groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} its cotangent bundle inherits a groupoid structure over the dual of the Lie algebroid of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}},

T𝒢A𝒢,T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows A_{\mathcal{G}}^{*},

with source and target maps induced, respectively, from the dual of the exact sequences (3) and (4). Explicitly, for αgTg𝒢\alpha_{g}\in T^{*}_{g}{\mathcal{G}} and aΓ(A𝒢)a\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}),

s~(αg),as(g)=αg,lgTi(a)\left\langle\tilde{s}(\alpha_{g}),a_{s(g)}\right\rangle=-\left\langle\alpha_{g},l_{g}\circ Ti(a)\right\rangle

and

t~(αg),at(g)=αg,rg(a).\left\langle\tilde{t}(\alpha_{g}),a_{t(g)}\right\rangle=\left\langle\alpha_{g},r_{g}(a)\right\rangle.

With multiplication determined by

m~(αg,βh),Tm(vg,wh)=αg,vg+βh,wh,\left\langle\tilde{m}(\alpha_{g},\beta_{h}),Tm(v_{g},w_{h})\right\rangle=\left\langle\alpha_{g},v_{g}\right\rangle+\left\langle\beta_{h},w_{h}\right\rangle,

for (vg.wh)(T𝒢)(2)(v_{g}.w_{h})\in(T{\mathcal{G}})^{(2)}.

There are two canonical bundles over MM associated to a VB-groupoid Γ\Gamma, they are called the side and core bundles of Γ\Gamma. The side bundle is just the vector bundle EE over MM. The core bundle CC is determined by the restriction to MM of the kernel KK of the surjective map

Γs~!sE;\Gamma\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\tilde{s}^{!}}}{{\longrightarrow}}s^{*}E;

explicitly, one defines CC as the restriction K|M\left.K\right|_{M} of KK to the units of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. The core bundle then can be thought of as the bundle in the complementar direction to that of the side bundle. These two bundles gives rise to the short exact sequence

(5) 0tCrΓs~!sE00\rightarrow t^{*}C\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\rightarrow}}\Gamma\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\tilde{s}^{!}}}{{\rightarrow}}s^{*}E\rightarrow 0

which is called the core sequence of Γ\Gamma, where rr is the right multiplication by zero elements of Γ\Gamma on the vectors of CC. Observe thus that the sequence (4) above is a particular case of this sequence.

The target map of Γ\Gamma determines a vector bundle map :CE\partial:C\rightarrow E between the core and side bundles of Γ\Gamma. This map, which is called the core-anchor map, coincides with the known anchor ρ𝒢\rho_{\mathcal{G}} of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} when Γ=T𝒢\Gamma=T{\mathcal{G}}.

An splitting σ:sEΓ\sigma:s^{*}E\to\Gamma of the exact sequence (5) is called unitary if over the units MM of 𝒢\mathcal{G} it coincides with the unit map uΓ:EΓu_{\Gamma}:E\to\Gamma of Γ\Gamma. In the particular case of the tangent groupoid (i.e., Γ=T𝒢\Gamma=T\mathcal{G}), such an unitary splitting is called an Ehresmann connection of 𝒢\mathcal{G} for the source ss.

These horizontal lifts of the core sequence have a relevant role in the representation theory of Lie groupoids. They allow to define quasi-actions ΔgE:Es(g)Et(g)\Delta^{E}_{g}:E_{s(g)}\to E_{t(g)} and ΔgC:Cs(g)Ct(g)\Delta^{C}_{g}:C_{s(g)}\to C_{t(g)} of 𝒢\mathcal{G} on the side and core bundles of Γ\Gamma which are key elements in the notion of 2-terms representations up to homotopy of Lie groupoids [24]. Explicitly, they are given by

ΔgE(es(g)):=tΓ(σg(es(g))), and ΔgC(cs(g)):=σg(ρ(cs(g)))cs(g)0g1.\Delta^{E}_{g}(e_{s(g)}):=t_{\Gamma}(\sigma_{g}(e_{s(g)})),\text{ and }\Delta^{C}_{g}(c_{s(g)}):=\sigma_{g}(\rho(c_{s(g)}))\cdot c_{s(g)}\cdot 0_{g}^{-1}.
Remark 2.10.

Notice that an interesting fact of these quasi-actions ΔC\Delta^{C} and ΔE\Delta^{E} is that they restrict to canonical actions of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on the spaces KerKer\;\partial and CokerCoker\;\partial. Explicitly, the action on KerKer\;\partial is given by

ΔgKer(cs(g)):=0gcs(g)0g1.\Delta^{Ker\;\partial}_{g}(c_{s(g)}):=0_{g}\cdot c_{s(g)}\cdot 0_{g}^{-1}.

In particular, in the case of the tangent VB-groupoid T𝒢T\mathcal{G} of a groupoid 𝒢\mathcal{G}, the action ΔKer(ρ)\Delta^{\text{\rm Ker}\,(\rho)} is called the adjoint action on the isotropy (possibly singular) bundle 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢\mathcal{G}; and the action ΔCoker(ρ)\Delta^{Coker(\rho)} turns out to be the so-called action of 𝒢\mathcal{G} on the normal (possibly singular) bundle ν𝒢\nu_{\mathcal{G}} whose fibers are the normal spaces to the orbits of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

VB-groupoid cohomology

VB-groupoids have a special cohomology induced from their own groupoid structure which, additionally, takes into account the linear structure of the vector bundle and aims to give a geometric interpretation of the 2-terms representations up to homotopy of Lie groupoids. Such a complex, which is called the VB-groupoid complex, was defined by Gracia-Saz and Mehta in [24] and it turns out to be (canonically) isomorphic to the deformation complex of Lie groupoids when considering the cotangent groupoid (see Remark 2.11), providing another interpretation of the deformation complex of a Lie groupoid. Its definition is as follows.

Let Γ\Gamma be a VB-groupoid. The differentiable complex of Γ\Gamma (as Lie groupoid) has a natural subcomplex Clin(Γ)C^{*}_{lin}(\Gamma) given by the fiberwise linear cochains of Γ\Gamma. The VB-groupoid complex CVB(Γ)C^{*}_{VB}(\Gamma) of Γ\Gamma is the subcomplex of Clin(Γ)C^{*}_{lin}(\Gamma) determined by the left-projectable elements of Clin(Γ)C^{*}_{lin}(\Gamma), that is, the elements satisfying the following two conditions

  1. (1)

    c(0g1,γg2,,γgk)=0c(0_{g_{1}},\gamma_{g_{2}},...,\gamma_{g_{k}})=0,

  2. (2)

    c(0gγg1,γg2,,γgk)=c(γg1,γg2,,γgk)c(0_{g}\cdot\gamma_{g_{1}},\gamma_{g_{2}},...,\gamma_{g_{k}})=c(\gamma_{g_{1}},\gamma_{g_{2}},...,\gamma_{g_{k}}).

This VB-complex turns out to be isomorphic to the one of 2-terms representation up to homotopy of 𝒢\mathcal{G} over the side and core bundles of the dual VB-groupoid, and thus allows us to think about the 2-terms representation theory in the geometric terms of VB-groupoids ([24]). In particular, it yields an interpretation of the adjoint representation of a Lie groupoid in terms of the VB-complex of the cotangent groupoid. In that way, having in mind the relation of the deformation complex of groupoids with the adjoint representation, then an expected but relevant fact of the VB-complex concerns its relation with the deformation complex of Lie groupoids:

Remark 2.11.

A straightforward computation shows that the deformation complex of a Lie groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is isomorphic to the VB-groupoid complex CVB(T𝒢)C^{*}_{VB}(T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}) of its cotangent VB-groupoid ([20], Prop. 4.5). The isomorphism is given by Cdef(𝒢)CVB(T𝒢)C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\longrightarrow C^{*}_{VB}(T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}), ccc\mapsto c^{\prime} with

c(ηg1,,ηgk)=ηg1,c(g1,,gk).c^{\prime}(\eta_{g_{1}},...,\eta_{g_{k}})=\left\langle\eta_{g_{1}},c(g_{1},...,g_{k})\right\rangle.

VB-Morita maps

A VB-Morita map takes the so important notion of Morita maps of Lie groupoids to the level of VB-groupoids. A morphism of VB-groupoids (Φ,ϕ):ΓΓ(\Phi,\phi):\Gamma\to\Gamma^{\prime} is a VB-Morita map if Φ\Phi is a Morita morphism [20]. In that sense, VB-Morita maps are supposed to play the same role as Morita maps for Lie groupoids. For instance, in [20] the authors prove the VB-Morita invariance of the VB-cohomology. That is, if Φ:ΓΓ\Phi:\Gamma\to\Gamma^{\prime} is a VB-Morita map then the VB-cohomologies HVB(Γ)H_{VB}^{\bullet}(\Gamma) and HVB(Γ)H_{VB}^{\bullet}(\Gamma^{\prime}) are isomorphic. In particular, since the tangent lift TΦ:T𝒢T𝒢T\Phi:T\mathcal{G}\to T\mathcal{G}^{\prime} of a Morita morphism Φ:𝒢𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{G}\to\mathcal{G}^{\prime} is a VB-Morita map then, by using Remark 2.11 and the fact that VB-Morita maps are preserved by dualization, the authors give an alternative proof of the Morita invariance of the deformation cohomology of Lie groupoids, first proven in [15]. We will also use the notion of VB-Morita morphisms to obtain a Morita invariance of the deformation cohomology of Lie groupoid morphisms. Such a result will make possible to connect the deformation cohomology of morphisms with maps of differentiable stacks (see Section 12).

3. Gauge maps and Deformation of morphisms

In this section we will define deformations of Lie groupoid morphisms. We also explain two ways in which two such deformations can be considered as equivalent deformations: by using either gauge maps or bisections. Each of these two ways turns out to be convenient depending on the examples and/or applications one has in mind, as we will see in the examples below. Let us first introduce the notion of gauge map.

A gauge map arises naturally from the concept of natural transformations between functors and allows us to relate two Lie groupoid morphisms when we regard them as functors between the groupoids. In that case, a natural transformation yields an obvious relation between two functors, and a gauge map is just an abstraction of that idea in which we define it without making reference to the functors (as it is the case of natural transformations). Formally: let 𝒢M\mathcal{G}\rightrightarrows M be a Lie groupoid, NN a manifold and τ:N𝒢\tau:N\to{\mathcal{G}} be a smooth map. We will call τ\tau a gauge map covering f:=s𝒢τ:NMf:=s_{\mathcal{G}}\circ\tau:N\to M. Thus indeed, given a gauge map τ\tau covering ff and a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} with base map f:NMf:N\to M, then τ\tau relates the morphism Φ\Phi to the morphism Φ\Phi^{\prime} defined by

Φ(h)=τ(t(h))Φ(h)τ(s(h))1.\Phi^{\prime}(h)=\tau(t(h))\Phi(h)\tau(s(h))^{-1}.

Given a bisection σ:M𝒢\sigma:M\to{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢\mathcal{G} and f:NMf:N\to M, one obtains a gauge map over ff by considering σf\sigma\circ f. But, there are in general more gauge maps than those obtained from bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G}. Hence, a bisection σ\sigma yields another relation between two morphisms: it relates the morphism Φ\Phi to the morphism Φ′′\Phi^{\prime\prime} defined by

Φ′′(h)=σ(f(t(h)))Φ(h)σ(f(s(h)))1.\Phi^{\prime\prime}(h)=\sigma(f(t(h)))\Phi(h)\sigma(f(s(h)))^{-1}.

Thus, the set of morphisms related by bisections to Φ\Phi is smaller than the set of morphisms related to Φ\Phi by gauge maps. These two manners of acting on a Lie groupoid morphism (either by gauge maps or bisections) are natural ways of generalizing the adjoint action of a Lie group on a Lie group homomorphism considered in [10] when working with deformations of Lie group homomorphisms.

We will consider below these two relations between morphisms at the level of deformations of morphisms: Definitions 3.2 and 3.3. However, as we will show in Proposition 3.9, under some conditions, a gauge map can be obtained by considering local bisections, and that fact can be used to prove that, at the level of deformations, such two relations can eventually be the same (see Proposition 3.11 and Theorem 3.13).

Deformations of Morphisms

Let N{\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N and 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M be two Lie groupoids and let

\textstyle{{\mathcal{H}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ\scriptstyle{\Phi}𝒢\textstyle{{\mathcal{G}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}N\textstyle{N\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}ϕ\scriptstyle{\phi}M\textstyle{M}

be a Lie groupoid morphism. Let II be an open interval containing 0.

Definition 3.1.

A deformation of Φ\Phi is a pair of smooth maps Φ~:×I𝒢\tilde{\Phi}:\mathcal{H}\times I\to\mathcal{G}, and ϕ~:N×IM\tilde{\phi}:N\times I\to M such that Φ~(,0)=Φ\tilde{\Phi}(\cdot,0)=\Phi, ϕ~(,0)=ϕ\tilde{\phi}(\cdot,0)=\phi, and for each εI{\varepsilon}\in I the map

\textstyle{{\mathcal{H}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φε\scriptstyle{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}𝒢\textstyle{{\mathcal{G}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}N\textstyle{N\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}ϕε\scriptstyle{\phi_{\varepsilon}}M\textstyle{M}

is a Lie groupoid morphism, where Φε=Φ~(,ε)\Phi_{\varepsilon}=\tilde{\Phi}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}) and similarly ϕε=ϕ~(,ε)\phi_{\varepsilon}=\tilde{\phi}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}).

Remark 3.1 (Fibrations).

A deformation of Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} can be equivalently described by a morphism Φ~\tilde{\Phi} between the trivial fibrations (×IN×III)({\mathcal{H}}\times I\rightrightarrows N\times I\longrightarrow I\rightrightarrows I) and (𝒢×IM×III)({\mathcal{G}}\times I\rightrightarrows M\times I\longrightarrow I\rightrightarrows I) covering the identity such that restricted to the fiber over 0 is Φ0\Phi_{0}. The corresponding base-map of Φ~\tilde{\Phi} between the units N×IN\times I and M×IM\times I will be ϕ~\tilde{\phi}.

In what follows we will denote a deformation of Φ:𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}.

We will consider smooth families of gauge maps covering smooth families of maps fε:NMf_{\varepsilon}:N\to M. By a smooth family of maps from NN to MM we mean a smooth map f~:N×IM\tilde{f}:N\times I\to M. Similarly, a smooth family of gauge maps over fεf_{\varepsilon} is a smooth map τ~:N×I𝒢\tilde{\tau}:N\times I\to\mathcal{G} such that τε=τ~(,ε)\tau_{\varepsilon}=\tilde{\tau}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}) is a gauge map over fε=f~(,ε)f_{\varepsilon}=\tilde{f}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}).

Definition 3.2.

Two deformations Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} and Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} of Φ\Phi are equivalent if there exists a smooth family τε:N𝒢\tau_{\varepsilon}:N\to\mathcal{G} of gauge maps with τ0=u𝒢ϕ0\tau_{0}=u_{\mathcal{G}}\circ\phi_{0}, where u𝒢u_{\mathcal{G}} denotes the identity bisection of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, and such that

(6) Φε(h)=τε(t(h))Φε(h)τε(s(h))1,\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}(h)=\tau_{\varepsilon}(t(h))\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)\tau_{\varepsilon}(s(h))^{-1},

for all ε{\varepsilon} in some open interval II containing 0, and all hh\in\mathcal{H}.

A deformation will be called trivial if it is gauge equivalent to the constant deformation.

Remark 3.2.

The set 𝒢au(N,𝒢)\mathcal{G}au(N,\mathcal{G}) of gauge maps τ:N𝒢\tau:N\to\mathcal{G} is naturally a groupoid over C(N,M)C^{\infty}(N,M) with structure determined pointwise by the groupoid structure of 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M. Moreover there is a natural (left) action of this groupoid on the set Mor(,𝒢)Mor(\mathcal{H},\mathcal{G}) of Lie groupoid morphisms from \mathcal{H} to 𝒢\mathcal{G}, where τ\tau acts on Φ:𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} if the base map ϕ\phi of Φ\Phi is equal to sτs\circ\tau, i.e., the moment map of the action is the map which associates to Φ:𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G}, its base map ϕ:NM\phi:N\to M. The action is given by

(τΦ)(h)=τ(t(h))Φ(h)τ(s(h))1.(\tau\cdot\Phi)(h)=\tau(t(h))\Phi(h)\tau(s(h))^{-1}.

With this notation, expression (6) becomes Φε=τεΦε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{\varepsilon}, for all ε{\varepsilon} in some open interval II containing 0.

Remark 3.3.

We remark that expression (6) only makes sense if τε\tau_{\varepsilon} is a family of gauge maps over ϕε\phi_{\varepsilon}. Observe also that if we regard the maps Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} and Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} as smooth families of functors, then the gauge maps τε\tau_{\varepsilon} are simply a smooth family of natural isomorphisms between these functors.

Example 3.4 (Non-trivial Deformation).

Let Φε:S1×S12\Phi_{\varepsilon}:\mathbb{R}\longrightarrow S^{1}\times S^{1}\subset\mathbb{C}^{2} be the family of morphisms given by

Φε(r):=(e2πir,e2πir(1+ε)),\Phi_{\varepsilon}(r):=(e^{2\pi ir},e^{2\pi ir(1+{\varepsilon})}),

where we view the Lie groups \mathbb{R} and S1×S1S^{1}\times S^{1} as Lie groupoids over a point. This is a nontrivial deformation because Φ=Φ0\Phi=\Phi_{0} is not injective, but Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is injective for any ε{\varepsilon}\in\mathbb{R}\setminus\mathbb{Q}.

Example 3.5.

Let P=N×GNP=N\times G\to N be the trivial principal GG-bundle over NN. There is a one-to-one correspondence between flat principal connections ω\omega on PP and Lie groupoid morphisms

Π1(N)\textstyle{\Pi_{1}(N)\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φω\scriptstyle{\Phi^{\omega}}G\textstyle{G\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}N\textstyle{N\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}{}.\textstyle{\{*\}.}

The correspondence is obtained by using parallel transport along curves on NN and the canonical identification of the fibers of PP with GG, i.e., if γ:[0,1]N\gamma:[0,1]\to N is a path, and γ~:[0,1]G\tilde{\gamma}:[0,1]\to G is such that γ~(0)=e\tilde{\gamma}(0)=e, and (γ,γ~)(\gamma,\tilde{\gamma}) is horizontal with respect to ω\omega, then Φω([γ])=γ~(1)\Phi^{\omega}([\gamma])=\tilde{\gamma}(1). Under this correspondence, gauge equivalence of morphisms translates to gauge equivalence of the connections. In particular, a deformation of a morphism Φω:Π1(N)G\Phi^{\omega}:\Pi_{1}(N)\to G is trivial if and only if the corresponding deformation of ω\omega is gauge trivial.

In example 3.8 below, we deal also with flat vector bundle connections in the context of Lie groupoid morphisms.

In some situations the notion of equivalence between morphisms we have defined may be too wide. The following is an example of such situation.

Example 3.6.

Let =N×NN\mathcal{H}=N\times N\rightrightarrows N and 𝒢=M×MM\mathcal{G}=M\times M\rightrightarrows M be pair groupoids. Any morphism (Φ,ϕ)(\Phi,\phi) from \mathcal{H} to 𝒢\mathcal{G} is of the form

Φ(x,y)=(ϕ(x),ϕ(y)),\Phi(x,y)=(\phi(x),\phi(y)),

and this determines a one to one correspondence between morphism for pair groupoids and smooth maps from NN to MM. Note that any two morphisms are equivalent by a gauge transformation. In fact, if Φ=(Φ,ϕ)\Phi=(\Phi,\phi) and Ψ=(Ψ,ψ)\Psi=(\Psi,\psi) are morphisms from N×NN\times N to M×MM\times M, then τ=(ϕ,ψ)\tau=(\phi,\psi) is a gauge transformation such that τΨ=Φ\tau\cdot\Psi=\Phi.

The example above suggests looking at deformations of morphisms up to stronger equivalences. An instance of that is obtained by taking bisections of groupoids (instead of gauge maps) which, in the previous example, corresponds to diffeomorphisms of the base manifold.

A smooth family of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} is a smooth map σ~:M×I𝒢\tilde{\sigma}:M\times I\to\mathcal{G} such that σε=σ~(,ε):M𝒢\sigma_{\varepsilon}=\tilde{\sigma}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}):M\to\mathcal{G} is a bisection for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I. Such a family of bisections will be denoted be σε\sigma_{\varepsilon}.

Definition 3.3.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} be a morphism of Lie groupoids. Two deformations Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} and Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} of Φ\Phi are strongly equivalent if there exist an open interval II containing 0, and a smooth family of bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of 𝒢\mathcal{G} such that σ0=u\sigma_{0}=u is the identity bisection, and

Φε(h)=σε(Φε(t(h)))Φε(h)σε(Φε(s(h)))1,\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)=\sigma_{\varepsilon}(\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}(t(h)))\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}(h)\sigma_{\varepsilon}(\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}(s(h)))^{-1},

for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I and hh\in\mathcal{H}.

In many instances, we will denote the conjugation by σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} by IσεI_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}, i.e.,

Iσε(g)=σε(t(g))gσe(s(g))1,I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}(g)=\sigma_{\varepsilon}(t(g))g\sigma_{e}(s(g))^{-1},

so that Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly equivalent to Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} if Φε=IσεΦε\Phi_{\varepsilon}=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}. A deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} will be called strongly trivial if Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly equivalent to the constant deformation Φε=Φ\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=\Phi for all ε{\varepsilon}, or in other words, if there exists a smooth family of bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} such that σ0=u\sigma_{0}=u, and Φε=IσεΦ\Phi_{\varepsilon}=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi.

Remark 3.7.

Note that if Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is a strongly trivial deformation of Φ=Φ0\Phi=\Phi_{0}, then Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} also can be regarded as a strongly trivial deformation of Φλ\Phi_{\lambda} for any λI{\lambda}\in I. Indeed, Φλ+ε=Iσλ+εσλ1Φλ\Phi_{{\lambda}+{\varepsilon}}=I_{\sigma_{{\lambda}+{\varepsilon}}\star\sigma_{\lambda}^{-1}}\circ\Phi_{\lambda}, where \star denotes the product in the group of bisections of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, which is given by (στ)(x)=σ(t(τ(x)))τ(x)(\sigma\star\tau)(x)=\sigma(t(\tau(x)))\tau(x); for σ\sigma and τ\tau bisections of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and xMx\in M. Notice that an analogous observation also holds for trivial deformations.

Example 3.8.

Let EME\to M be a vector bundle over MM. There is a one-to-one correspondence between flat connections \nabla on EE and Lie groupoid morphisms

Π1(M)\textstyle{\Pi_{1}(M)\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ\scriptstyle{\Phi^{\nabla}}𝒢L(E)\textstyle{\mathcal{G}L(E)\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}M\textstyle{M\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}=\scriptstyle{=}M.\textstyle{M.}

This correspondence is obtained by using the parallel transport along curves on MM. Under this correspondence, two connections 1\nabla_{1} and 2\nabla_{2} related by a gauge transformation FAut(E)F\in\mathrm{Aut}(E) induce strongly equivalent Lie groupoid morphisms Φ1\Phi^{\nabla_{1}} and Φ2\Phi^{\nabla_{2}}. Explicitly, if 2=F1F1\nabla_{2}=F\circ\nabla_{1}\circ F^{-1} then Φ2=IFΦ1\Phi^{\nabla_{2}}=I_{F}\circ\Phi^{\nabla_{1}}, where we see FAut(E)F\in\mathrm{Aut}(E) as a bisection of the groupoid 𝒢L(E)\mathcal{G}L(E). We just remark that for a general bisection bBis(𝒢L(E))b\in\mathrm{Bis}({\mathcal{G}}L(E)), however, the morphism IbΦI_{b}\circ\Phi^{\nabla} does not correspond to some connection of EE due to the fact that its base map f:=tbDiff(M)f:=t\circ b\in\mathrm{Diff}(M) can be different from the identity idMid_{M}, but it does corresponds to a connection of the pullback bundle fEf^{*}E.

Equivalent vs Strongly Equivalent deformations

For each ϕ:NM\phi:N\to M a bisection bb of 𝒢\mathcal{G} induces a gauge transformation τb=bϕ:N𝒢\tau_{b}=b\circ\phi:N\to\mathcal{G} covering ϕ\phi. It then follows that strongly equivalent deformations are equivalent. Theorem 3.13 below will deal with the converse and more subtle statement due to the fact that not all the gauge maps are obtained from bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G}. Still, Proposition 3.9 below shows that there are some cases where the gauge map can be induced by a local bisection. Recall that a local bisection of 𝒢\mathcal{G} is a local section σU:UM𝒢\sigma_{U}:U\subset M\to\mathcal{G} of the source map such that tσU:UMt\circ\sigma_{U}:U\to M is a diffeomorphism onto its image.

Proposition 3.9.

Let 𝒢\mathcal{G} be a Hausdorff Lie groupoid and τ:N𝒢\tau:N\to\mathcal{G} be a gauge map covering an embedding, i.e., such that ϕ=sτ:NM\phi=s\circ\tau:N\to M is an embedding. Then there exists a local bisection b:U𝒢b:U\to\mathcal{G} defined on a neighbourhood UU of ϕ(N)\phi(N) such that τ=bϕ\tau=b\circ\phi if, and only if, tτt\circ\tau is also an embedding.

To prove the proposition we will use an Ehresmann connection HH on 𝒢\mathcal{G} which is (also) transversal to the tt-fibers, that is the reason of assuming 𝒢\mathcal{G} to be Hausdorff since, under non-Hausdorffness, an Ehresmann connection may not exist (see Example 13.93 in [14]). The existence of such a ss and tt-transversal connection is the content of Lemma 3.10 which we state next.

Lemma 3.10.

Let s,t:𝒢Ms,t:\mathcal{G}\to M be the source and target maps of a Lie groupoid 𝒢\mathcal{G}. If 𝒢\mathcal{G} admits an Ehresmann connection, then there exists an Ehresmann connection for the source ss which is also an Ehresmann connection for the target tt.

Proof.

The strategy to obtain this connection will be to vary locally an Ehresmann connection HH of ss in such a way that the intersections with the tangent spaces to the tt-fibers are {0}\{0\}, and then glue these local connections together by using a partition of the unity.

Let denote by Ig=HgKer(dgt)I_{g}=H_{g}\cap\mathrm{Ker}(d_{g}t) the intersection of HH with the tangent space at gg to the tt-fibers. Then, for every g𝒢g\in\mathcal{G}, Tg𝒢=Ker(dgs)IgIgT_{g}\mathcal{G}=Ker(d_{g}s)\oplus I_{g}\oplus I_{g}^{\perp}, where IgI_{g}^{\perp} means the orthogonal to IgI_{g} inside HgH_{g} for some Riemannian metric on 𝒢\mathcal{G} such that HH is the orthogonal space to the ss-fibers.

Recall that an Ehresmann connection can be equivalently described by a morphism ω:T𝒢tA𝒢\omega:T\mathcal{G}\to t^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}} of vector bundles which is a left-inverse of the right-multiplication r:tA𝒢T𝒢r:t^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}\to T\mathcal{G}. This map ω\omega is regarded as the projection of the tangent vectors of 𝒢\mathcal{G} to the ss-vertical bundle VstA𝒢V^{s}\cong t^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}. The horizontal distribution HH corresponds with the kernel of the morphism ω\omega.

Thus, for any g𝒢g\in\mathcal{G} let UgU_{g} be an open coordinate neighbourhood around gg such that the tt-fiber through gg corresponds to a slice on UgU_{g}. We will define a new (local) connection ωUg\omega_{U_{g}} on UgU_{g} by modifying the values of ωg\omega_{g} at the part IgI_{g} to be non-zero and extending, by translation, to the other points of UgU_{g}. In that way, by shrinking UgU_{g} if needed, ωUg\omega_{U_{g}} will be the local connection on UgU_{g} which is complementar to the ss-fibers and tt-fibers.

Explicitly, if Ig=0I_{g}=0 then we choose UgU_{g} small enough such that, for all points in UgU_{g}, Ig=0I_{g}=0. Otherwise, if Ig0I_{g}\neq 0 for some gg, then, in order to modify ωg\omega_{g}, we just need to do it in a linear way. For that it suffices to take basis for IgI_{g} and At(g)A_{t(g)} and make an injective correspondence of the basic elements of IgI_{g} with the elements of the basis of At(g)A_{t(g)}. We then define ωUg\omega_{U_{g}} by extending to UgU_{g} the modified ωg\omega_{g} by translation, say, as a constant-coefficient linear map on the coordinate neighborhood UgU_{g}. Shrinking UgU_{g} if necessary it follows that the intersection Kerh(ωUg)Ker(dht)Ker_{h}(\omega_{U_{g}})\cap Ker(d_{h}t) is trivial for any hUgh\in U_{g}.

Thus, consider the open cover (Uα)(U_{\alpha}) of 𝒢\mathcal{G} given by the sets UgU_{g}, and let (ρα)(\rho_{\alpha}) be a partition of 1 subordinated to (Uα)(U_{\alpha}), therefore

ω:=Σαραωα\omega^{\prime}:=\Sigma_{\alpha}\rho_{\alpha}\omega_{\alpha}

determines an Ehresmann connection HH^{\prime} on 𝒢\mathcal{G} for the source map which is also complementar to the tt-vertical bundle. That is, HH^{\prime} is an Ehresmann connection for the source and the target maps of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Proof of Proposition 3.9.

Let τ\tau be a gauge transformation such that ϕ=sτ\phi=s\circ\tau is an embedding. It is clear that if τ=σUϕ\tau=\sigma_{U}\circ\phi for some local bisection σU\sigma_{U} of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, then tτ=(tσU)ϕt\circ\tau=(t\circ\sigma_{U})\circ\phi is an embedding.

For the converse statement, we first use the horizontal curves of an Ehresmann connection as in the previous Lemma to construct a local section σ:U𝒢\sigma:U\to\mathcal{G} of the source map which contains the image τ(N)\tau(N) of the gauge map. Then we check that it is also a local bisection of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Use the Ehresmann connection to make the source map a Riemannian submersion where the horizontal spaces correspond to the orthogonal spaces to the ss-fibers. Then, by using the horizontal geodesics starting at τ(N)\tau(N), we obtain a submanifold S𝒢S\subset\mathcal{G} such that its projection by the source map yields a tubular neighborhood UU of ϕ(N)M\phi(N)\subset M. This fact defines uniquely the local section σ:U𝒢\sigma:U\to\mathcal{G} by making the correspondence of curves under the ss-projection.

Moreover, the local section σ\sigma is in fact a local bisection of 𝒢\mathcal{G}: since the horizontal spaces are also complementar to the tt-fibers then, by shrinking the radius of SS if necessary, the submanifold SS tt-projects injectively to a tubular neighborhood of tτ(N)t\circ\tau(N) in MM. Therefore, tσt\circ\sigma is a local diffeormorphism of MM. ∎

Hence, in some cases the gauge maps are induced by (local) bisections. We can then wonder if that also happens when considering a smooth family of gauge maps as in the case of trivial deformations. It turns out that, under a compactness condition we can avoid the Hausdorffness of 𝒢\mathcal{G} and check that there exists a smoooth family of (global) bisections inducing the gauge maps. That is the content of the Proposition below.

Proposition 3.11.

Let \mathcal{H} and 𝒢\mathcal{G} be Lie groupoids over NN and MM, respectively, and Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} be a morphism covering an injective immersion ϕ0\phi_{0}. Assume that NN is compact. Then, any trivial deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of Φ0\Phi_{0} is indeed strongly trivial.

Proof.

Let τε\tau_{\varepsilon} be the smooth family of gauge maps associated to the trivial deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. We will prove that there exists a smooth family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} which induces the gauge maps in the sense that τε=σεϕ0\tau_{\varepsilon}=\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{0}.

We will do that by considering the smooth family of local sections α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} induced by the family τε\tau_{\varepsilon}, and then extending them to global sections αε\alpha_{\varepsilon} to obtain the global bisections we want by using the exponential map.

On the one hand, let Φ:×I𝒢×I\Phi:\mathcal{H}\times I\to\mathcal{G}\times I denote the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, as in Remark (3.1), covering the map ϕ:N×IM×I\phi:N\times I\to M\times I. Then, after shrinking II if necessary, the map ϕ:N×IM×I\phi:N\times I\longrightarrow M\times I is an injective imersion, and also an embedding due to the fact that each ϕε\phi_{\varepsilon} is an embedding. Moreover, the compactness of NN also implies that ϕ(N×I)\phi(N\times I) is closed inside M×IM\times I.

On the other hand, define the local sections α¯εΓ(ϕεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}), induced by the family of gauge maps τε\tau_{\varepsilon}, by

(7) α¯ε(x):=rτε(x)1(ddλ|λ=ετλ(x)).\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}(x):=r_{\tau_{\varepsilon}(x)}^{-1}\left(\frac{d}{d{\lambda}}|_{{\lambda}={\varepsilon}}\tau_{\lambda}(x)\right).

Notice that this family of sections can be regarded as the smooth section α¯Γ(ϕA𝒢×I)\bar{\alpha}\in\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}\times I}) of the pullback by ϕ\phi^{*} of the Lie algebroid A𝒢×IA_{\mathcal{G}\times I} given by α¯(x,ε):=α¯ε(x)\bar{\alpha}(x,{\varepsilon}):=\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}(x). Thus, since the map ϕ\phi is injective, the section α¯Γ(ϕA𝒢×I)\bar{\alpha}\in\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{{\mathcal{G}}\times I}) can be seen as a section of the restriction Lie algebroid A𝒢×I|ϕ(N×I)\left.A_{{\mathcal{G}}\times I}\right|_{\phi(N\times I)}. Therefore, we can extend the section α¯\bar{\alpha} to a section α\alpha of all A𝒢×IA_{{\mathcal{G}}\times I} which we extend in such a way that its support is contained in an open subset U×IM×IU\times I\subset M\times I, where UMU\subset M is an open subset containing ϕ0(N)\phi_{0}(N) with compact closure U¯\bar{U}.

This extended section has the form α(x,ε)=αε(x)\alpha(x,{\varepsilon})=\alpha_{{\varepsilon}}(x), with αεΓ(A𝒢)\alpha_{{\varepsilon}}\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}) extending α¯εΓ(ϕεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}}\in\Gamma(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}). Let σ\sigma denote the bisection of 𝒢×I\mathcal{G}\times I induced by the exponential flow of the section α\alpha. Such a bisection amounts to having a smooth family σε:M𝒢\sigma_{\varepsilon}:M\to\mathcal{G} of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} which can be alternatively obtained by using the flow of the time-dependent vector field αε\overrightarrow{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}} on 𝒢\mathcal{G} as follows. Let ψt1,t0\psi^{t_{1},t_{0}} denote the time-dependent flow of αε\overrightarrow{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}}. Due to the compactness of U¯\overline{U} and the vanishing of the sections αε\alpha_{{\varepsilon}} outside UU, the flow ψε,0\psi^{{\varepsilon},0} is defined on all MM for ε{\varepsilon} small enough. Thus, the family of bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is given by σε(p):=ψε,0(p)\sigma_{{\varepsilon}}(p):=\psi^{{\varepsilon},0}(p), for pMp\in M.

In that way, the curve εσε(ϕ0(x)){\varepsilon}\mapsto\sigma_{\varepsilon}(\phi_{0}(x)) is an integral curve of the time-dependent vector field αε\overrightarrow{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} starting at ϕ0(x)\phi_{0}(x). Also, by equation (7) the curve εσε(ϕ0(x)){\varepsilon}\mapsto\sigma_{\varepsilon}(\phi_{0}(x)) is an integral curve starting at the same point. Hence the family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} induces the family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps; that is,

τε(x)=ψε,0(ϕ0(x))=σεϕ0(x).\tau_{\varepsilon}(x)=\psi^{{\varepsilon},0}(\phi_{0}(x))=\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{0}(x).

Therefore, the strong triviality of the deformation follows. ∎

Remark 3.12.

In the previous proof, notices that the family of bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} can be different depending on the choice of the open set UU and on the extension α\alpha of α¯\bar{\alpha}. However, if α\alpha^{\prime} is another such an extension with induced family of bisections σε\sigma^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}, then these two families of bisections agree when restricted to ϕ0(N)\phi_{0}(N), which is the key fact for the proof. That follows from the last equation in the proof where one gets

σεϕ0(x)=τε(x)=σεϕ0(x).\sigma^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{0}(x)=\tau_{\varepsilon}(x)=\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{0}(x).

The next theorem tells us that under certain conditions, the relations of equivalence and strongly equivalence of deformations are the same.

Theorem 3.13.

Let {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} be Lie groupoids over NN and MM, respectively, and Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism covering an injective immersion ϕ0\phi_{0}. Assume that NN is compact and 𝒢\mathcal{G} is Hausdorff. Then, any two deformations of Φ0\Phi_{0} are equivalent if, and only if, are strongly equivalent.

Proof.

Since a bisection induce a gauge map by composition with the base map, then two strongly equivalent deformations are clearly equivalent. For the converse question, assume that Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} and Ψε\Psi_{\varepsilon} are two equivalent deformations of Φ0\Phi_{0}. Then,

(8) Ψε=τεΦε;\Psi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{\varepsilon};

where τε\tau_{\varepsilon} is a smooth family of gauge maps covering the family ϕε\phi_{\varepsilon}.

Let denote by Ψ,Φ:×I𝒢×I\Psi,\;\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I\to{\mathcal{G}}\times I the morphisms covering ψ\psi and ϕ\phi which encode the deformations Ψε\Psi_{\varepsilon} and Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, respectively. That is, one has Ψ(h,ε)=(Ψε(h),ε)\Psi(h,{\varepsilon})=(\Psi_{\varepsilon}(h),{\varepsilon}) and Φ(h,ε)=(Φε(h),ε)\Phi(h,{\varepsilon})=(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h),{\varepsilon}). Then, the equation (8) can also be expressed by

(9) Ψ=τΦ;\Psi=\tau\cdot\Phi;

where τ:N×I𝒢×I\tau:N\times I\to\mathcal{G}\times I is the gauge map τ(x,ε)=(τε(x),ε)\tau(x,{\varepsilon})=(\tau_{\varepsilon}(x),{\varepsilon}) covering the map ϕ\phi. Observe then that, shrinking II if necessary, since ϕ\phi and ψ\psi are embedding maps, it follows from Proposition 3.9 that there exists a local bisection σ\sigma of the groupoid 𝒢×I\mathcal{G}\times I such that τ=σϕ\tau=\sigma\circ\phi.

Next step now consists in obtaining a global bisection inducing the gauge map τ\tau. Let σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} be the smooth family of local bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} induced by σ\sigma. We will obtain the global bisection by considering the infinitesimal side of the local bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} and then using the exponential map. Indeed, let xNx\in N and consider the vectors tangent to 𝒢\mathcal{G}

ddεσεϕε(x).\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{\varepsilon}(x).

These vectors are not necessarily tangent to the ss-fibers of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, for that we use an Ehresmann connection on 𝒢\mathcal{G} to project the vectors to the ss-fibers. Let define by α¯εΓ(ΨεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(\Psi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) the family of sections obtained by right translation of the projection to the ss-fibers of the vectors ddεσεϕε(x)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{\varepsilon}(x), for all xNx\in N. Thus, since ψ\psi is an embedding map (shrinking II if necessary), it follows that the family α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} can be regarded as a section α¯Γ(A𝒢×I|ψ(N×I))\bar{\alpha}\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}\times I}|_{\psi(N\times I)}) over the closed submanifold ψ(N×I)M×I\psi(N\times I)\subset M\times I of the Lie algebroid A𝒢×IA_{\mathcal{G}\times I} of 𝒢×I\mathcal{G}\times I.

Therefore, we can extend the section α¯\bar{\alpha} to a global section α\alpha of A𝒢×IA_{\mathcal{G}\times I}. Then finally, by using the exponential flow of α\alpha, as in the proof of Proposition 3.11, we obtain a smooth family of bisections σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of 𝒢\mathcal{G} which induces the family of gauge maps τε\tau_{\varepsilon}. ∎

4. Deformation complex Cdef(Φ)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi) of a morphism and properties

In this section we introduce the deformation complex of morphisms and study some of its properties.

Deformation complex of morphisms

The deformation complex of a morphism was briefly discussed in [15], it turns out to be the appropriate complex to deal with trivial deformations of morphisms (Section 8). We will first recall its definition here. Let (N,s,t)(\mathcal{H}\rightrightarrows N,s_{\mathcal{H}},t_{\mathcal{H}}) and (𝒢M,s𝒢,t𝒢)({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M,s_{\mathcal{G}},t_{\mathcal{G}}) be two Lie groupoids and (Φ,ϕ):𝒢(\Phi,\phi):{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a morphism between them.

For any kk\in\mathbb{N}, consider (k)={(h1,,hk):s(hi)=t(hi+1)}{\mathcal{H}}^{(k)}=\left\{(h_{1},...,h_{k}):s_{\mathcal{H}}(h_{i})=t_{\mathcal{H}}(h_{i+1})\right\} the manifold of kk-strings of composable arrows of {\mathcal{H}} with (0)=N{\mathcal{H}}^{(0)}=N. The space of kk-cochains Cdefk(Φ)C^{k}_{def}(\Phi) is given by

Cdefk(Φ)={c:(k)T𝒢|c(h1,,hk)TΦ(h1)𝒢 and c is s𝒢-projectable},C^{k}_{def}(\Phi)=\left\{\left.c:{\mathcal{H}}^{(k)}\rightarrow T{\mathcal{G}}\right|\ c(h_{1},...,h_{k})\in T_{\Phi(h_{1})}{\mathcal{G}}\text{ and }c\text{ is }s_{\mathcal{G}}\text{-projectable}\right\},

where s𝒢s_{\mathcal{G}}-projectable means that the s𝒢s_{\mathcal{G}}-projection of cc, ds𝒢c(h1,,hk)=:sc(h2,,hk)Tt(Φ(h2))Mds_{\mathcal{G}}\circ c(h_{1},...,h_{k})=:s_{c}(h_{2},...,h_{k})\in T_{t(\Phi(h_{2}))}M, does not depend on h1h_{1}. The differential of cc is defined by

(δΦc)(h1,,hk+1):\displaystyle(\delta_{\Phi}c)(h_{1},...,h_{k+1}): =dm¯𝒢(c(h1h2,h3,,hk+1),c(h2,,hk+1))+\displaystyle=-d\bar{m}_{\mathcal{G}}(c(h_{1}h_{2},h_{3},...,h_{k+1}),c(h_{2},...,h_{k+1}))+
+i=2k(1)ic(h1,hihi+1,hk+1)+(1)k+1c(h1,,hk),\displaystyle+\sum_{i=2}^{k}(-1)^{i}c(h_{1},...h_{i}h_{i+1},...h_{k+1})+(-1)^{k+1}c(h_{1},...,h_{k}),

where m¯𝒢:𝒢s×s𝒢𝒢\overline{m}_{\mathcal{G}}:{\mathcal{G}}_{s}\times_{s}{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}, m¯𝒢(g,h)=gh1\overline{m}_{\mathcal{G}}(g,h)=gh^{-1} is the division map of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.
For k=0k=0, Cdef0(Φ):=Γ(ϕA𝒢)C^{0}_{def}(\Phi):=\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) and the differential is

δΦα=α+αCdef1(Φ),\delta_{\Phi}\alpha=\overrightarrow{\alpha}+\overleftarrow{\alpha}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi),

where α(h)=rΦ(h)(αt(h))\overrightarrow{\alpha}(h)=r_{\Phi(h)}(\alpha_{t(h)}) and α(h)=lΦ(h)(di(αs(h)))\overleftarrow{\alpha}(h)=l_{\Phi(h)}(di(\alpha_{s(h)})).

The fact that δΦ2=0\delta_{\Phi}^{2}=0 follows in a similar way to the proof that δ2=0\delta^{2}=0 in the deformation complex of Lie groupoids; so δΦ\delta_{\Phi} in fact defines a cohomology and Hdef(Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Phi) denotes the deformation cohomology of Φ\Phi. Observe that Hdef(Id𝒢)=Hdef(𝒢)H^{*}_{def}(Id_{\mathcal{G}})=H^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}).

Remark 4.1.

Note that, given a morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}, there are two natural cochain maps between the deformation complexes (of Lie groupoids and morphisms):

Cdefk()ΦCdefk(Φ)ΦCdefk(𝒢)C_{def}^{k}({\mathcal{H}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi_{*}}}{{\longrightarrow}}C_{def}^{k}(\Phi)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi^{*}}}{{\longleftarrow}}C_{def}^{k}({\mathcal{G}})

defined by

(Φc)(h1,,hk):=(dΦ)h1(c(h1,hk)),cCdefk();and(\Phi_{*}c_{\mathcal{H}})(h_{1},...,h_{k}):=(d\Phi)_{h_{1}}(c_{\mathcal{H}}(h_{1},...h_{k})),\ \ \ c_{\mathcal{H}}\in C^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{H}});\ \text{and}
(Φc𝒢)(h1,,hk):=c𝒢(Φ(h1),,Φ(hk)),c𝒢Cdefk(𝒢).(\Phi^{*}c_{\mathcal{G}})(h_{1},...,h_{k}):=c_{\mathcal{G}}(\Phi(h_{1}),...,\Phi(h_{k})),\ \ c_{\mathcal{G}}\in C^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}).

Observe that in the case k=0k=0 the cochain map Φ\Phi^{*} is just the pullback ϕ\phi^{*} of sections Γ(A𝒢)Γ(ϕA𝒢)\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}})\to\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) (recall that ϕ\phi is the induced map on the units). Similarly, if 𝒦Ψ\mathcal{K}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Psi}}{{\rightarrow}}{\mathcal{H}} is another Lie groupoid morphism, one can define a cochain-map Ψ:Cdef(Φ)Cdef(ΦΨ)\Psi^{*}:C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}(\Phi\circ\Psi).

Remark 4.2.

As a special case, if Φ\Phi above is bijective, there is an inverse Φ#\Phi_{\#} of Φ\Phi^{*},

Φ#:Cdef(Φ)Cdef(𝒢),Φ#(T^)(g1,,gk):=T^(Φ1(g1),,Φ1(gk)).\Phi_{\#}:C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}),\ \Phi_{\#}(\hat{T})_{(g_{1},...,g_{k})}:=\hat{T}_{(\Phi^{-1}(g_{1}),...,\Phi^{-1}(g_{k}))}.

Similarly, if Φ\Phi^{*} is the map between deformation complexes of morphisms (see Remark 4.1), then Φ\Phi^{*} also admits an inverse map Φ#:Cdef(ΦΨ)Cdef(Φ)\Phi_{\#}:C^{*}_{def}(\Phi\circ\Psi)\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}(\Phi) analogously defined.

The deformation complex (Cdef(Φ),δ)(C^{*}_{def}(\Phi),\delta) has a canonical subcomplex Cdef(Φ)s,tC^{*}_{def}(\Phi)_{s,t} which controls deformations of Φ\Phi that keeps the base map ϕ\phi fixed (see remark 4.3). It is defined by,

(10) Cdefk(Φ)s,t:={cCdefk(Φ)|dsc0dtc}.C^{k}_{def}(\Phi)_{s,t}:=\{c\in C^{k}_{def}(\Phi)|ds\circ c\equiv 0\equiv dt\circ c\}.

It is straightforward to check that δ\delta preserves Cdef(Φ)s,tC^{*}_{def}(\Phi)_{s,t}, so (Cdef(Φ)s,t,δ)(C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)_{s,t},\delta) is indeed a complex.

Remark 4.3.

Any deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} which keeps the base map fixed determines a 1-cocycle

ddε|ε=0ΦεCdef1(Φ0)s,t,\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\Phi_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{0})_{s,t},

which explains the choice of the name for this complex. This fact will be fully detailed for the more general case of arbitrary deformations of morphisms in Section 8.

Example 4.4.

Deformations of vector bundle connections as in example 3.8 above and deformations of representations, as in Section 5, give instances of deformations of morphisms where the base map is kept fixed.

By using right multiplication to translate the tangent vectors c(h1,,hk)TΦ(h1)𝒢c(h_{1},...,h_{k})\in T_{\Phi(h_{1})}\mathcal{G} over the unit elements of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, the complex Cs,t(Φ)C_{s,t}^{*}(\Phi) takes a simpler description as the differentiable complex Cdiff(,Φ𝔦𝒢)C^{*}_{\mathrm{diff}}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{{\mathcal{G}}}) with values in the pullback by Φ\Phi of the (maybe singular) isotropy bundle 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. The action of \mathcal{H} on Φ𝔦𝒢\Phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}} is given by the pullback by Φ\Phi of the adjoint action of 𝒢\mathcal{G} on 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}}, as defined in remark 2.10. We observe that even in the case of a singular isotropy bundle one can still make sense of the differentable complex by defining smooth functions with values in 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}} as those smooth functions with image in A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} which take values in 𝔦𝒢\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}}.

4.1. Alternative description of the deformation complex

The deformation complex of morphisms can be expressed in a different way by using the theory of VB-groupoids. This interpretation will be useful to get a better understanding of the properties of this cohomology; in particular, it will allow us to obtain the vanishing results in a simple way. Note first that, if 𝒱E\mathcal{V}\rightrightarrows E is a VB-groupoid over 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M with source and target s~\tilde{s} and t~\tilde{t} and with core-bundle CC then, as pointed out in [24], the VB-complex CVB(𝒱)Clin(𝒱)C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{VB}}({\mathcal{V}}^{*})\subset C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{lin}}({\mathcal{V}}^{*}) of 𝒱{\mathcal{V}}^{*} can be identified with a new complex which we denote by (CVB(𝒢,𝒱),δ)(C^{\bullet}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}),\delta), where CVB0(𝒢,𝒱):=ΓM(C)C^{0}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}):=\Gamma_{M}(C) and

(11) CVBk(𝒢,𝒱):={cΓ𝒢(k)(prk𝒱);c(g1,,gk)𝒱g1 and c is s~projectable}C^{k}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}):=\{c\in\Gamma_{{\mathcal{G}}^{(k)}}(pr_{k}^{*}{\mathcal{V}});c(g_{1},...,g_{k})\in{\mathcal{V}}_{g_{1}}\text{ and }c\text{ is }\tilde{s}\mathrm{-projectable}\}

for k>0k>0; and whose differential is the one induced by the differential of CVB(𝒱)C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{VB}}({\mathcal{V}}^{*}) under the identification. Here, one says that cc is s~\tilde{s}-projectable if s~(c(g1,,gk))\tilde{s}(c(g_{1},...,g_{k})) does not depend on g1g_{1}.

In fact, the identification is given by

(12) CVBk\displaystyle C^{k}_{VB} (𝒢,𝒱)\displaystyle({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}) \displaystyle\longrightarrow CVBk\displaystyle C^{k}_{VB} (𝒱)\displaystyle({\mathcal{V}}^{*})
c\displaystyle c \displaystyle\longmapsto c~:(ηg1,,ηgk)ηg1,c(g1,,gk),\displaystyle\tilde{c}:\ \ \ (\eta_{g_{1}},...,\eta_{g_{k}})\mapsto\left\langle\eta_{g_{1}},c(g_{1},...,g_{k})\right\rangle,

where ηgi\eta_{g_{i}} is in the fiber 𝒱gi{\mathcal{V}}^{*}_{g_{i}} over gig_{i}.

With this at hand, it is straightforward to check that the deformation complex Cdef(Φ)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi) of a morphism (Φ,ϕ):𝒢(\Phi,\phi):{\mathcal{H}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} is the complex CVB(,ΦT𝒢)C^{*}_{VB}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi^{*}T{\mathcal{G}}), where ΦT𝒢\Phi^{*}T{\mathcal{G}} is the pullback by Φ\Phi of the tangent VB-groupoid T𝒢T{\mathcal{G}}. Thus we have,

Proposition 4.5.

The map (12) above induces an isomorphism between the complexes Cdef(Φ)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi) and CVB(ϕT𝒢)C^{*}_{VB}(\phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}). Moreover, after the choice of a connection σ\sigma on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, Cdef(Φ)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi) is isomorphic to C(,ΦAd𝒢σ):=C(,ϕA𝒢)C1(,ϕTM)C({\mathcal{H}},\Phi^{*}Ad^{\sigma}_{{\mathcal{G}}})^{*}:=C^{*}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}})\oplus C^{*-1}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}TM), which is the complex with the structure of pullback adjoint representation (up to homotopy) of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} induced by σ\sigma. So, in particular, Hdef(Φ)H(,ΦAd𝒢)H_{def}^{*}(\Phi)\cong H^{*}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi^{*}Ad_{{\mathcal{G}}}).

Sketch of proof. The proof of the second claim follows from the interpretation of VB-complexes as 2-terms representations up to homotopy of groupoids after the choice of a unitary splitting of the core sequence (5) (see [24]). In particular, under this philosophy, the VB-complex CVB(T𝒢)C^{\bullet}_{VB}(T^{*}\mathcal{G}) of T𝒢T^{*}{\mathcal{G}} induces on C(𝒢,A𝒢TM):=C(,A𝒢)C1(,TM)C({\mathcal{G}},A_{\mathcal{G}}\oplus TM)^{\bullet}:=C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{H}},A_{\mathcal{G}})\oplus C^{\bullet-1}({\mathcal{H}},TM) the structure of the adjoint representation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}; in this case an unitary splitting of the core sequence of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} amounts to a connection on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Similarly, by using the connection σ\sigma, one can see the VB-complex CVB(ΦT𝒢)C^{*}_{VB}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}) as the pullback C(,ϕA𝒢ϕTM)C({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}\oplus\phi^{*}TM)^{*} by Φ\Phi of the adjoint representation Ad𝒢σAd^{\sigma}_{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Thus, by the isomorphism (12) above, the deformation complex of morphisms is isomorphic to the complex representing the pullback of the adjoint representation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.   \lozenge

Remark 4.6.

One can check that a proof of the second claim in the previous Proposition can also be made by some explicit computations after the choice of an Ehresmann connection of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, in the same way as the proof of Lemma 9.1 in [15].

Remark 4.7.

We notice that combining the identification (12) Cdef(Φ)CVB(ΦT𝒢)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\to C^{*}_{VB}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G}) and the quasi-isomorphism [7] CVB(ΦT𝒢)Clin(Φ(T𝒢))C^{*}_{VB}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G})\hookrightarrow C^{*}_{lin}(\Phi^{*}(T^{*}\mathcal{G})) towards the linear complex Clin(Φ(T𝒢))C^{*}_{lin}(\Phi^{*}(T^{*}\mathcal{G})), associated to the VB-groupoid ΦT𝒢\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G} , one gets the identification of the cohomologies

Hdef(Φ)Hlin(ΦT𝒢).H^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\longrightarrow H^{*}_{lin}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G}).

Explicitly, the composition of the maps

Cdef(Φ)CVB(ΦT𝒢)Clin(ΦT𝒢)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\longrightarrow C^{*}_{VB}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G})\hookrightarrow C^{*}_{lin}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}\mathcal{G})

induces a quasi-isomorphism of complexes.

4.2. Properties and Variation of the complex Cdef(Φ)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi)

According to the terminology of equivalence of deformations of morphisms we can also say that two morphisms of Lie groupoids are equivalent if they are isomorphic when viewed as functors. The following result then tell us that the deformation cohomology of morphisms is an object associated to the equivalence classes of morphisms.

Theorem 4.8.

Let Φ\Phi, Ψ:𝒢\Psi:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} be two Lie groupoid morphisms. If Φ\Phi and Ψ\Psi are equivalent then their deformation cohomologies Hdef(Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Phi) and Hdef(Ψ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi) are isomorphic.

For the proof of this Theorem we first recall the groupoid of arrows 𝒢I=𝒢×M𝒢×M𝒢\mathcal{G}^{I}=\mathcal{G}\times_{M}{\mathcal{G}}\times_{M}\mathcal{G} of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, where the objects of 𝒢I\mathcal{G}^{I} are the arrows of 𝒢\mathcal{G} and the arrows of 𝒢I\mathcal{G}^{I} are given by commutative squares of arrows in 𝒢\mathcal{G} or, in other words, by three arrows (g,h,k)𝒢I(g,h,k)\in\mathcal{G}^{I} with common sources.

\textstyle{\cdot\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}\textstyle{\cdot\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}g\scriptstyle{g}h\scriptstyle{h}k\scriptstyle{k}\textstyle{\cdot}\textstyle{\cdot\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}

where the source, target and multiplication maps are respectively given by the right and left arrows of the commutative square, and by the concatenation of the diagramas. That is, s(g,h,k)=ks(g,h,k)=k, t(g,h,k)=gh1t(g,h,k)=gh^{-1} and (g,h,k)(g,h,k)=(gg,hg,k)(g^{\prime},h^{\prime},k^{\prime})\cdot(g,h,k)=(g^{\prime}g,h^{\prime}g,k). With these notations, it is straightforward to see that the maps which take the upper and lower arrows of the square are Morita morphisms. Explicitly,

Lemma 4.9.

Let uu and ll denote the maps p1,m¯p2,3:𝒢I𝒢p_{1},\;\overline{m}\circ p_{2,3}:{\mathcal{G}}^{I}\to{\mathcal{G}} given by

p1:(g,h,k)g,andp_{1}:(g,h,k)\mapsto g,\ \ \text{and}
m¯p2,3:(g,h,k)hk1\overline{m}\circ p_{2,3}:(g,h,k)\mapsto hk^{-1}

which take the upper and lower arrows of a commutative square in 𝒢I{\mathcal{G}}^{I}. Then, the maps uu and ll are Morita morphisms covering the source s:𝒢Ms:\mathcal{G}\to M and target maps t:𝒢Mt:\mathcal{G}\to M of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, respectively.

Proof of Theorem 4.8.

Let τ:ΦΨ\tau:\Phi\to\Psi be the gauge map which relates the morphism Φ\Phi to Ψ\Psi.

Notice that the gauge map τ\tau can be seen as the Lie groupoid morphism

τ~:𝒢I\tilde{\tau}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}^{I}
τ~(h):=(Φ(h),τ(t(h))Φ(h),τ(s(h))).\tilde{\tau}(h):=(\Phi(h),\tau(t(h))\Phi(h),\tau(s(h))).

Such a morphism encodes the isomorphic morphisms Φ\Phi and Ψ\Psi by composing with the upper and lower morphisms uu and ll of 𝒢I\mathcal{G}^{I}, indeed, Φ=uτ~\Phi=u\circ\tilde{\tau} and Ψ=lτ~\Psi=l\circ\tilde{\tau}.

We will now prove that the cohomologies Hdef(Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Phi) and Hdef(Ψ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi) are isomorphic to Hdef(τ~)H^{*}_{def}(\tilde{\tau}). Indeed, these isomorphisms follow from observing that if f:𝒢f:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} is any morphism, then a Morita map F:𝒢𝒦F:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{K}} induces the quasi-isomorphism F:Cdef(f)Cdef(Ff)F_{*}:C_{def}^{*}(f)\longrightarrow C_{def}^{*}(F\circ f). This is the content of Proposition 12.2 in Section 12 where we prove the isomorphism between deformation cohomologies by using the notion of VB-Morita maps. Therefore, this fact along with the previous Lemma tell us that the upper and lower morphisms induce isomorphisms in the cohomologies, as we wanted. ∎

We describe now a variation of the deformation complex of morphisms which should be though of as the tangent space to the Moduli space of morphisms with the relation induced by bisections. Indeed, such a variation will be relevant for us in order to deal with the characterization of strongly trivial deformations. It just consists of changing the space Cdef0(Φ)=Γ(ϕA𝒢)C^{0}_{def}(\Phi)=\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) of sections of the pullback algebroid by the space of pullback sections ϕ(Γ(A𝒢))\phi^{*}(\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}})). We denote this complex by C~def(Φ)\tilde{C}^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi). Explicitly,

C~def0(Φ)=ϕ(Γ(A𝒢))\tilde{C}^{0}_{def}(\Phi)=\phi^{*}(\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}))

and

C~defk(Φ)=Cdefk(Φ),for k>0.\tilde{C}^{k}_{def}(\Phi)=C^{k}_{def}(\Phi),\ \text{for }k>0.

Observe that the cohomology H~def(Φ)\tilde{H}^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi) is larger than the usual deformation cohomology Hdef(Φ)H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi). This fact is not a surprise in view that the space of trivial deformations is larger than the space of strongly trivial deformations.

5. Examples

Representations of Lie groupoids and flat connections can be viewed as morphisms of Lie groupoids. We study below their deformation cohomologies when regarded as morphisms.

Recall that a representation of a Lie groupoid 𝒢M\mathcal{G}\rightrightarrows M on a vector bundle EME\to M is a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:𝒢𝒢L(E)\Phi:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{G}}L(E), covering the identity, from 𝒢\mathcal{G} to the General Linear groupoid. One can naturally consider deformations of representations of Lie groupoids as a special instance of deformations of morphisms of Lie groupoids. We define a deformation of a representation of a Lie groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on a vector bundle EME\to M as a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of the morphism Φ:𝒢𝒢L(E)\Phi:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{G}}L(E) which keeps the base map fixed (which is the identity). Therefore, the complex Cs,t(Φ)C^{\bullet}_{s,t}(\Phi) (see expression (10)) should control the deformations of the representation Φ\Phi.

The representation Φ\Phi induces a canonical action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on the vector bundle End(E)End(E) of endomorphisms of EE as follows:

(13) gFs(g):=Φ(g)Fs(g)Φ(g)1,g\cdot F_{s(g)}:=\Phi(g)\circ F_{s(g)}\circ\Phi(g)^{-1},

where g:xyg:x\to y is an element of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and FxF_{x} denotes an element in the fiber End(E)xEnd(E)_{x} of End(E)End(E) over xx. Thus, since the complex Cs,t(Φ)C^{\bullet}_{s,t}(\Phi) can be described in terms of the isotropy bundle of 𝒢L(E)\mathcal{G}L(E) and 𝔦𝒢L(E)=End(E)\mathfrak{i}_{{\mathcal{G}}L(E)}=End(E), it follows that the complex controlling the deformations of the representation Φ\Phi of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is Cdiff(𝒢,End(E))C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{diff}}({\mathcal{G}},End(E)), where the differential is induced from the canonical action (13) defined above. By other side, one can check that the deformation cohomology Hdef(Φ)H^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{def}}(\Phi) agrees with such a Hs,t(Φ)H^{\bullet}_{s,t}(\Phi).

Proposition 5.1 (Representations of Lie groupoids).

Let Φ:𝒢𝒢L(E)\Phi:{\mathcal{G}}\to{\mathcal{G}}L(E) be a representation of 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M on the vector bundle EME\to M. Then Hdef(Φ)Hdiff(𝒢;End(E)).H_{\mathrm{def}}^{*}(\Phi)\cong H_{\mathrm{diff}}^{*}({\mathcal{G}};\ End(E)).

Proof.

This isomorphism in cohomology can be checked directly as the induced by the right translation r:Cdiff(𝒢;End(E))Cdef(Φ)r:C_{\mathrm{diff}}^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}};\ End(E))\longrightarrow C_{def}^{\bullet}(\Phi) after notice two things: (i) that End(E)End(E) is the isotropy bundle of Lie algebras of the Lie algebroid 𝔤𝔩(E):=Lie(𝒢L(E))\mathfrak{gl}(E):=Lie({\mathcal{G}}L(E)) and (ii) that the action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on End(E)End(E) defined above agrees with the canonical adjoint action described in Remark 2.10. In Section 7 we give an alternative way to check this isomorphism (see example 7.3).

The previous Proposition tell us then that the usual deformation cohomology Hdef(Φ)H^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{def}}(\Phi) of Φ:𝒢𝒢L(E)\Phi:\mathcal{G}\to\mathcal{G}L(E) is the one that controls deformations of the representation EE of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Remark 5.2.

Similarly one can see that if the target groupoid, for any morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}}, is transitive then all the information of a deformation of Φ\Phi is concentrated just on the cohomology of \mathcal{H} with values in the isotropy bundle of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. In some sense that means that the non-trivial deformations of 𝒢\mathcal{G} will be determined by the isotropy directions of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Remark 5.3.

In the special case of a representation of 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M on TMTM, we can get an alternative view-point in terms of 1-jets: the groupoid 𝒢L(TM){\mathcal{G}}L(TM) can be though as the Lie groupoid J1(M,M)J^{1}(M,M) of 1-jets of local diffeomorphisms of MM, and its Lie algebroid corresponds to the set J1(TM)J^{1}(TM) of 1-jets of vector fields on MM. The vector bundle End(TM,TM)End(TM,TM) translates to the set J01(TM):={jx1X;X𝔛(M) and X(x)=0}J^{1}_{0}(TM):=\{j^{1}_{x}X;X\in\mathfrak{X}(M)\text{ and }X(x)=0\} of 1-jets of vector fields on its singular points. The action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on J01(TM)J^{1}_{0}(TM) will be obtained by pulling back the canonical action of J1(M,M)J^{1}(M,M) on J01(TM)J^{1}_{0}(TM) given by

jx1Φjx1X:=jΦ(x)1(ΦX).j^{1}_{x}\Phi\ast j^{1}_{x}X:=j^{1}_{\Phi(x)}(\Phi_{*}X).
Example 5.4 (Connections on vector bundles).

Example 3.8 allows us to see any flat connection \nabla on a vector bundle EME\to M as a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:Π1(M)𝒢L(E)\Phi^{\nabla}:\Pi_{1}(M)\to\mathcal{G}L(E) covering the identity map IdMId_{M}. Equivalently, \nabla is regarded as a representation of Π1(M)\Pi_{1}(M).

Thus, we define a deformation of \nabla by flat connections as a deformation of the associated morphism Φ\Phi^{\nabla} which keeps the base map fixed (which is the identity).

Hence, by Remark 5.2, the deformation cohomology controlling deformations of \nabla by flat connections should be

Hs,t(Φ)Hdiff(Π1(M);End(E)).H^{\bullet}_{s,t}(\Phi^{\nabla})\cong H^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{diff}}(\Pi_{1}(M);End(E)).

In particular, when MM is a simply connected manifold, since Π1(M)\Pi_{1}(M) will be proper, it follows that

Hs,tk(Φ)=0,for all k>0.H^{k}_{s,t}(\Phi^{\nabla})=0,\ \text{for all }k>0.

In that case, the Theorem 8.5 tells us that the flat connections can be deformed just in a trivial manner.

Example 5.5 (Flat principal connections).

Example 3.5 regards any flat principal connection ω\omega on the trivial GG-principal bundle over NN as a Lie groupoid morphism Φω:Π1(N)G\Phi^{\omega}:\Pi_{1}(N)\to G uniquely.

Therefore, by Remark 5.2, the cohomology controlling deformations of ω\omega by flat principal connections is

Hs,t(Φω)Hdiff(Π1(N),𝔤N),H^{\bullet}_{s,t}(\Phi^{\omega})\cong H^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{diff}}(\Pi_{1}(N),\mathfrak{g}_{N}),

where 𝔤N\mathfrak{g}_{N} is the trivial vector bundle with fiber 𝔤=Lie(G)\mathfrak{g}=Lie(G) over NN.

Example 5.6 (Morse Lie groupoid morphisms).

The notion of Morse-Lie groupoid morphism has been defined recently in [37] as a morphism (F,f):𝒢M(F,f):{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M\to\mathbb{R}\rightrightarrows\mathbb{R} towards the unital groupoid over \mathbb{R} such that every critical orbit of ff is non-degenerate. Indeed, the critical points of a Lie groupoid morphism towards the unital groupoid come in saturated subspaces, in that sense the non-degeneracy of a critical orbit is determined in terms of the non-degeneracy of the normal Hessian of ff. Even though, a Morse-Lie groupoid morphism is in particular a morphism towards the unital groupoid over \mathbb{R}, which is a regular groupoid with no isotropy . Therefore its deformation cohomology groups can be computed according the following sequence induced from (20) for every k>0k>0

0Hdefk(F)Hk1(𝒢,fν)0.0\to H^{k}_{def}(F)\to H^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},f^{*}\nu_{\mathbb{R}})\to 0.

The degree zero cohomology vanishes and is computed according Example 6.3. More explicitly, the cohomology groups are given in terms of the differentiable cohomology

Hdefk(F)Hk1(𝒢,).H^{k}_{def}(F)\cong H^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathbb{R}).

Therefore, it turns out that the cohomology does not depend on the morphism FF but only on the groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

6. Low degrees and vanishing

In this section we will describe the deformation cohomology groups in low degrees. A central point here will be the description of the deformation complex in terms of VB-groupoids. The content of this section will be key to show the stability properties of morphisms.

Let 𝒱E{\mathcal{V}}\rightrightarrows E be a VB-groupoid over 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M, with core CC and core-anchor map :CE\partial:C\rightarrow E. We consider the following (possibly singular) vector bundles

𝔨=Kerand𝔩=Coker\mathfrak{k}=Ker\>\partial\ \ \ \text{and}\ \ \ \mathfrak{l}=Coker\>\partial

over MM. It is a known fact that, even though 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}} and 𝔩{\mathfrak{l}} may be singular, 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} induces canonical actions of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on them (see Section 2.2 or [24]). In particular they turn out to be actual representations if 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} is a regular VB-groupoid (see Section 7). Nevertheless, we can make sense of the cohomologies with values in 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}} and 𝔩{\mathfrak{l}} in the singular case, as we show below. We are mainly interested in the low degree cohomologies. Define the ‘smooth sections’ of 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}} and 𝔩{\mathfrak{l}} by

Γ(𝔨):=C0(𝒢,𝔨)={σΓ(C)|σ(x)𝔨xCx}\Gamma({\mathfrak{k}}):=C^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}})=\left\{\sigma\in\Gamma(C)|\sigma(x)\in{\mathfrak{k}}_{x}\subset C_{x}\right\}

and

Γ(𝔩):=C0(𝒢,𝔩)=Γ(E)Im(),\Gamma({\mathfrak{l}}):=C^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{l}})=\frac{\Gamma(E)}{Im(\partial)},

where we are looking at \partial as the induced map on sections Γ(C)Γ(E)\Gamma(C)\rightarrow\Gamma(E).

Remark 6.1.

Note that the definition of C0(𝒢,𝔨)C^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}) as the subspace of sections in ΓM(C)\Gamma_{M}(C) with values in 𝔨C{\mathfrak{k}}\subset C has the direct generalization to define Ck(𝒢,𝔨)C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}) as the subspace of sections in Γ𝒢(k)(tkC)\Gamma_{{\mathcal{G}}^{(k)}}(t_{k}^{*}C) which take values in 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}}; where tk:𝒢(k)Mt_{k}:{\mathcal{G}}^{(k)}\rightarrow M is given by tk(g1,,gk)=t(g1)t_{k}(g_{1},...,g_{k})=t(g_{1}). Also, the canonical action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}} allows us define a differential δ:Ck(𝒢,𝔨)Ck+1(𝒢,𝔨)\delta:C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}})\rightarrow C^{k+1}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}) with the same formula as that of the differentiable cohomology of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} with values in a representation. Such a differential makes (C(𝒢,𝔨),δ)(C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}),\delta) a cochain complex, whose cohomology we denote by H(𝒢,𝔨)H^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}). Moreover, this complex with values in 𝔨\mathfrak{k} can be viewed as a subcomplex of the VB-complex CVB(𝒢,Γ)C^{\bullet}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma) through the right multiplication by zero elements:

(14) r(c)(g1,,gk):=c(g1,,gk)0g1𝒱g1,cCk(𝒢,𝔨).r(c)(g_{1},...,g_{k}):=c(g_{1},...,g_{k})\cdot 0_{g_{1}}\ \ \in\ {\mathcal{V}}_{g_{1}},\ \ c\in C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}).

Following the idea of Lemma 4.5 and Definition 4.6 of [15], we can make sense of H0(𝒢,𝔩)H^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{l}}) as being the invariant sections of 𝔩{\mathfrak{l}}.

Definition 6.1.

Let VΓ(E)V\in\Gamma(E). We say that [V]Γ(𝔩)[V]\in\Gamma({\mathfrak{l}}) is invariant if there exists a section XΓ𝒢(𝒱)X\in\Gamma_{{\mathcal{G}}}({\mathcal{V}}) which is both s~\tilde{s}-projectable and t~\tilde{t}-projectable to VV. In other words, XX is an (s~,t~)(\tilde{s},\tilde{t})-lift of VV. We denote the space of invariant elements by

H0(𝒢,𝔩)=ΓM(𝔩)inv.H^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{l}})=\Gamma_{M}({\mathfrak{l}})^{inv}.

Observe that when 𝔨{\mathfrak{k}} and 𝔩{\mathfrak{l}} are vector bundles, the previous definitions agree with the usual ones of cochains with values in a representation of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. With the general setting above, we obtain the following two propositions related to the low degree cohomologies.

Proposition 6.2.

If 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} is a VB-groupoid over 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} one has H0(𝒢,𝒱)H0(𝒢,𝔨)=Γ(𝔨)invH^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}})\cong H^{0}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}})=\Gamma({\mathfrak{k}})^{inv}.

Proof.

It is clear that the differential of C(𝒢,𝒱)C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}) on a 0-cochain αΓ(C)\alpha\in\Gamma(C) is given by δ(α)(g)=αt(g)0g+0gi𝒱(αs(g))\delta(\alpha)(g)=\alpha_{t(g)}\cdot 0_{g}+0_{g}\cdot i_{{\mathcal{V}}}(\alpha_{s(g)}). Thus, since t~(δ(α)(g))=(α(t(g)))\tilde{t}(\delta(\alpha)(g))=\partial(\alpha(t(g))) then α\alpha is a 0-cocycle if and only if αΓ(𝔨)\alpha\in\Gamma({\mathfrak{k}}) and αt(g)=0gi𝒱(αs(g))0g1=0gαs(g)0g1\alpha_{t(g)}=-0_{g}\cdot i_{{\mathcal{V}}}(\alpha_{s(g)})\cdot 0_{g}^{-1}=0_{g}\cdot\alpha_{s(g)}\cdot 0_{g^{-1}}. That is, if and only if αΓ(𝔨)inv\alpha\in\Gamma({\mathfrak{k}})^{inv}. ∎

Thus, in particular we obtain,

Example 6.3.

For a morphism of Lie groupoids (Φ,ϕ):𝒢(\Phi,\phi):{\mathcal{G}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{H}}, Hdef0(Φ)Γ(ϕ𝔦𝒢)invH^{0}_{def}(\Phi)\cong\Gamma(\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{{\mathcal{G}}})^{inv}.

Proposition 6.4.

Let 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} be a VB-groupoid as above. Then we have the following exact sequence

(15) 0H1(𝒢,𝔨)rHVB1(𝒢,𝒱)πΓ(𝔩)invKH2(𝒢,𝔨)rHVB2(𝒢,𝒱)0\longrightarrow H^{1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{1}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\longrightarrow}}\Gamma(\mathfrak{l})^{inv}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{2}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{2}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}})

where the maps r,πr,\ \pi and KK are determined as follows:

the map rr is induced by the cochain map (denoted again by) rr defined in (14); π\pi is induced by the s~\tilde{s}-projection of the elements of CVB1(𝒢,𝒱)C^{1}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}) to the sections ΓM(E)\Gamma_{M}(E) of the side bundle; and KK takes an invariant element [V][V] to δ(X)C2(𝒢,𝔨)rCVB2(𝒢,𝒱)\delta(X)\in C^{2}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\hookrightarrow}}C^{2}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}), where XX is any (s~,t~)(\tilde{s},\tilde{t})-lift of VV.

Proof.

The proof of this sequence is entirely analogous to that of the sequence in Proposition 4.11 of [15]. We just remark that δ(X)\delta(X) above in fact has image in C2(𝒢,𝔨)C^{2}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}): it suffices to observe that s~(δ(X))=0=t~(δ(X))\tilde{s}(\delta(X))=0=\tilde{t}(\delta(X)). The fact that KK is well-defined was already shown in Lemma 4.9 in [15]. ∎

As particular cases of the previous sequence we obtain some key sequences in the context of deformation cohomologies.

Examples 6.5.
  1. (1)

    It is straightforward to see that if 𝒱=T𝒢{\mathcal{V}}=T{\mathcal{G}} then the sequence above reproduces the sequence in Proposition 4.11 of [15] for the deformation complex of Lie groupoids.

  2. (2)

    Let (Φ,ϕ):𝒢(\Phi,\phi):{\mathcal{H}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a morphism of Lie groupoids. By taking the VB-groupoid 𝒱=ϕT𝒢{\mathcal{V}}=\phi^{*}T{\mathcal{G}} we obtain a sequence for the deformation complex of the morphism Φ\Phi:

    (16) 0H1(,ϕ𝔦𝒢)rHdef1(Φ)s~Γ(ϕν𝒢)invKH2(,ϕ𝔦𝒢)Hdef2(Φ),0\rightarrow H^{1}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\rightarrow}}H^{1}_{def}(\Phi)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\tilde{s}}}{{\rightarrow}}\Gamma(\phi^{*}\nu_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\rightarrow}}H^{2}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}})\rightarrow H^{2}_{def}(\Phi),

    where ι𝒢{\iota}_{\mathcal{G}} is the isotropy bundle of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} and ν𝒢\nu_{\mathcal{G}} is the normal bundle to the orbits of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

Vanishing of cohomologies

Here we state the vanishing results for the deformation cohomology. The proofs are straightforward applications of the VB-groupoid interpretation of the deformation complex, the vanishing result of the VB-cohomology [7] and of the sequence (16).

Proposition 6.6.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a morphism of Lie groupoids. If {\mathcal{H}} is proper, then Hdef0(Φ)Γ(ϕi𝒢)invH^{0}_{def}(\Phi)\cong\Gamma(\phi^{*}i_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv}, Hdef1(Φ)Γ(ϕν𝒢)invH^{1}_{def}(\Phi)\cong\Gamma(\phi^{*}\nu_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv} and Hdefk(Φ)=0H^{k}_{def}(\Phi)=0 for every k2k\geq 2, where ν𝒢\nu_{\mathcal{G}} is the normal bundle to the orbits of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

Remark 6.7.

Alternatively, a direct proof of the vanishing of cohomology for morphisms also can be made in an analogous way to that of the vanishing of the deformation cohomology of proper Lie groupoids in [15].

7. Regular setting

In this section we show that the sequence (15) is just part of a long exact sequence when we impose some regularity conditions on the groupoids. Later we illustrate the long exact sequences which can be deduced from it. We say that a VB-groupoid 𝒱E{\mathcal{V}}\rightrightarrows E is regular if its core-anchor map :CE\partial:C\to E has constant rank.

Theorem 7.1.

Let 𝒢M{\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M be a Lie groupoid and 𝒱E{\mathcal{V}}\rightrightarrows E be a regular VB-groupoid over 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Then there exists a map K:H(𝒢,𝔩)H+2(𝒢,𝔨)K:H^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{l}})\longrightarrow H^{\bullet+2}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathfrak{k}}) such that the cohomology HVB(𝒢,𝒱)H^{*}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}}) associated to 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} fits into the long exact sequence

(17) Hk(𝒢,𝔨)rHk(𝒢,𝒱)πHk1(𝒢,𝔩)KHk+1(𝒢,𝔨),\cdots\longrightarrow H^{k}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k}({\mathcal{G}},{\mathcal{V}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k+1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\longrightarrow\cdots,

where rr and π\pi are the maps induced by the right multiplication by zero elements of 𝒱{\mathcal{V}} and the s~\tilde{s}-projection of elements in 𝒱{\mathcal{V}}.

Proof.

The proof of this theorem is an adaptation of the one of Proposition 8.1 in [15] for the deformation cohomology of regular Lie groupoids. Note that the regularity condition on the VB-groupoid Γ\Gamma tells us that the associated cohomology induced by the complex CEC\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\partial}}{{\longrightarrow}}E associated to Γ\Gamma is given by the cohomology bundles 𝔨=Ker()\mathfrak{k}=\mathrm{Ker(\partial)} and 𝔩=Coker()\mathfrak{l}=\mathrm{Coker}(\partial) over MM, where CC and EE are the core and side bundles of Γ\Gamma. With this setting we construct the complexes 𝒞\mathcal{C}^{\bullet} and 𝒜\mathcal{A}^{\bullet} which fit into the following exact sequences

(18) 0C(𝒢,𝔨)rC(𝒢,Γ)R𝒞00\longrightarrow C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{k})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle R}}{{\longrightarrow}}\mathcal{C}^{\bullet}\longrightarrow 0
(19) 0𝒞𝒜SC(𝒢,𝔩)0,0\longrightarrow\mathcal{C}^{\bullet}\longrightarrow\mathcal{A}^{\bullet}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle S}}{{\longrightarrow}}C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l})\longrightarrow 0,

where 𝒜\mathcal{A}^{\bullet} is acyclic. Namely, 𝒜\mathcal{A}^{\bullet} is defined by

𝒜k=Ck(𝒢,E)Ck1(𝒢,E)\mathcal{A}^{k}=C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},E)\oplus C^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},E)

with differential δ(ω,η)=(δω,ωδη)\delta(\omega,\eta)=(\delta^{\prime}\omega,\omega-\delta^{\prime}\eta), where δ:C(𝒢,E)C+1(𝒢,E)\delta^{\prime}:C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},E)\longrightarrow C^{\bullet+1}({\mathcal{G}},E) is expressed by

δ(ω)(g1,,gk+1)=i=1k(1)k+1ω(g1,,gigi+1,,gk+1)+(1)k+1ω(g1,,gk).\delta^{\prime}(\omega)(g_{1},...,g_{k+1})=\sum^{k}_{i=1}(-1)^{k+1}\omega(g_{1},...,g_{i}g_{i+1},...,g_{k+1})+(-1)^{k+1}\omega(g_{1},...,g_{k}).

It is straightforward to check that 𝒜\mathcal{A}^{\bullet} is acyclic: it is the mapping cone of the identity IdC(𝒢,E)Id_{C^{*}({\mathcal{G}},E)}.

The map S:𝒜C(𝒢,𝔩)S:\mathcal{A}^{\bullet}\longrightarrow C^{\bullet}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l}) is given by

S(ω,η)(g1,,gk)=[ω(g1,,gk)]g1[η(g2,,gk)],S(\omega,\eta)(g_{1},...,g_{k})=[\omega(g_{1},...,g_{k})]-g_{1}\cdot[\eta(g_{2},...,g_{k})],

where [V]𝔩[V]\in\mathfrak{l} denotes the class of VEV\in E in 𝔩\mathfrak{l} and ‘g1g_{1}\cdot’ the action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} induced by Γ\Gamma on 𝔩\mathfrak{l}. This map SS is compatible with the differentials. The complex 𝒞\mathcal{C}^{\bullet} is taken as being the kernel of SS, and RR takes a cochain cCk(𝒢,Γ)c\in C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma) to the pair

R(c)=(ωc,ηc)Ck(𝒢,E)Ck1(𝒢,E),R(c)=(\omega_{c},\eta_{c})\in C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},E)\oplus C^{k-1}({\mathcal{G}},E),

where ωc\omega_{c} and ηc\eta_{c} are the t~\tilde{t} and s~\tilde{s}-projection of cc, respectively. Observe that the definition of the quasi-action of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} on EE, induced by Γ\Gamma, implies that RR in fact takes values in 𝒞\mathcal{C}^{\bullet} and hence ImRKerS\mathrm{Im}R\subset\mathrm{Ker}S. Again, RR is compatible with the differentials. By choosing a splitting σ\sigma of the core-sequence

tCrΓs~sEt^{*}C\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}\Gamma\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\tilde{s}}}{{\longrightarrow}}s^{*}E

it is possible to show, analogous to the proof of the Proposition 8.1 in [15], that KerSImR\mathrm{Ker}S\subset\mathrm{Im}R. It is also clear that Imr=KerR\mathrm{Im}\>r=\mathrm{Ker}R. The surjectivity of SS follows from the surjectivity of the projection Ep𝔩E\stackrel{{\scriptstyle p}}{{\longrightarrow}}\mathfrak{l}; in particular, if [ω]Ck(𝒢,𝔩)[\omega]\in C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l}) with ωCk(𝒢,E)\omega\in C^{k}({\mathcal{G}},E) then S(ω,0)=[ω]S(\omega,0)=[\omega].

In that way, the long exact sequence induced by the sequence (18) is exactly the long sequence to be proved up to an isomorphism

θ:H1(𝒢,𝔩)H(𝒞)\theta:H^{\bullet-1}({\mathcal{G}},\mathfrak{l})\longrightarrow H^{\bullet}(\mathcal{C})

induced by the sequence (19). Hence to complete the proof it suffices to show that R=θπR=\theta\circ\pi in cohomology. Indeed, take γ\gamma a cocycle in CVBk(𝒢,Γ)C^{k}_{VB}({\mathcal{G}},\Gamma), thus π(γ)=[s~(γ)]\pi(\gamma)=[\tilde{s}(\gamma)]. Therefore, θ(γ¯)=θ([s~(γ)]¯)=δ(s~(γ),0)¯\theta\circ(\bar{\gamma})=\theta(\overline{[\tilde{s}(\gamma)]})=\overline{\delta(\tilde{s}(\gamma),0)}; that is, (δ(s~(γ)),s~(γ))(\delta^{\prime}(\tilde{s}(\gamma)),\tilde{s}(\gamma)) represents de cohomology class θ([s~(γ)]¯)Hk(𝒞)\theta(\overline{[\tilde{s}(\gamma)]})\in H^{k}(\mathcal{C}^{\bullet}). On the other hand, since R(γ)=(t~(γ),s~(γ))R(\gamma)=(\tilde{t}(\gamma),\tilde{s}(\gamma)) is a cocycle, then (0,0)=(δ(t~(γ)),t~(γ)δ(s~(γ)))(0,0)=(\delta^{\prime}(\tilde{t}(\gamma)),\tilde{t}(\gamma)-\delta^{\prime}(\tilde{s}(\gamma))), which implies δ(s~(γ))=t~(γ)\delta^{\prime}(\tilde{s}(\gamma))=\tilde{t}(\gamma). Hence, (t~(γ),s~(γ))=R(γ)(\tilde{t}(\gamma),\tilde{s}(\gamma))=R(\gamma) represents the cohomology class θ([s~(γ)]¯)\theta(\overline{[\tilde{s}(\gamma)]}), which completes the proof. ∎

Remark 7.2.

The a priori arbitrary complex 𝒜\mathcal{A} defined in the previous proof is a key element of the argument. Nevertheless one can give a more geometric meaning of it in terms of VB-groupoids as follows. Consider the anchor morphism

𝒱\textstyle{{\mathcal{V}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}an𝒱\scriptstyle{an_{{\mathcal{V}}}}Pair(E)\textstyle{Pair(E)\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}𝒢\textstyle{\mathcal{G}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}an𝒢\scriptstyle{an_{\mathcal{G}}}Pair(M)\textstyle{Pair(M)}

between VB-groupoids. Then, the complex 𝒜\mathcal{A} is just the complex C(𝒢,an𝒢(Pair(E)))C^{\bullet}(\mathcal{G},an^{*}_{\mathcal{G}}(Pair(E))) associated to the pullback VB-groupoid an𝒢(Pair(E))an^{*}_{\mathcal{G}}(Pair(E)) over 𝒢\mathcal{G}. And thus the acyclicity of 𝒜\mathcal{A} follows directly from the vanishing of the VB-cohomology of the proper VB-groupoid Pair(E)\mathrm{Pair}(E) and from the acyclicity of its associated 2-term complex =Id:EE\partial=Id:E\to E.

We can thus use the previous theorem and obtain a long exact sequence for the deformation cohomology.

Example 7.3.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a morphism of Lie groupoids and assume that 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is regular. Then there exists a map K:H(,ϕν𝒢)H+2(,ϕ𝔦𝒢)K:H^{*}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\nu_{\mathcal{G}})\rightarrow H^{*+2}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}}) such that Hdef(Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Phi) fits into the long exact sequence:

(20) Hk(,ϕ𝔦𝒢)rHdefk(Φ)πHk1(,ϕν𝒢)KHk+1(,ϕ𝔦𝒢),\cdots\longrightarrow H^{k}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k}_{def}(\Phi)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\pi}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k-1}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\nu_{{\mathcal{G}}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{k+1}({\mathcal{H}},\phi^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}})\longrightarrow\cdots,

where ν𝒢\nu_{\mathcal{G}} is the normal bundle to the orbits of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

8. Triviality of deformations of morphisms

We discuss here characterizations of the several types of triviality of deformations of morphisms in terms of the deformation cohomology. The main results in this section can be regarded as a Moser type theorem in the context of morphisms of Lie groupoids.

Proposition 8.1.

Let Φε\Phi_{{\varepsilon}} be a deformation of (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Then, for each λ\lambda we obtain a 1-cocycle

Xλ(h)=ddε|ε=λΦε(h)X_{\lambda}(h)=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=\lambda}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)

in the deformation complex of Φλ\Phi_{\lambda}. Moreover, the corresponding cohomology class at time ε=0{\varepsilon}=0 in Hdef1(Φ0)H^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{0}) depends only on the equivalence class of the deformation.

Proof.

The first part follows from taking derivative at ε=λ{\varepsilon}={\lambda} of the morphism condition Φε(m¯(gh,h))=m¯𝒢(Φε(gh),Φε(h))\Phi_{\varepsilon}(\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{H}}}(gh,h))=\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{G}}}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(gh),\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)) satisfied by every Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. In fact, we get

Xλ(g)dm¯𝒢(Xλ(m(g,h)),Xλ(h))=0,X_{{\lambda}}(g)-d\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{G}}}(X_{{\lambda}}(m_{{\mathcal{H}}}(g,h)),X_{{\lambda}}(h))=0,

which says that XλX_{\lambda} is a 1-cocycle in Cdef(Φλ)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi_{\lambda}).

Now suppose that Ψε\Psi_{\varepsilon} is a deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0} which is equivalent to Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. Then Ψε=τεΦε\Psi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{\varepsilon} for a smooth family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps over ϕ0\phi_{0} with τ0=1𝒢ϕ0\tau_{0}=1_{\mathcal{G}}\circ\phi_{0}. Denote by X0X^{\prime}_{0} the associated 1-cocycle at time zero. Heuristically, the exactness of X0X0X^{\prime}_{0}-X_{0} comes from taking derivatives at ε=0{\varepsilon}=0 of the equivalence condition Ψε=τεΦε\Psi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{\varepsilon}. However, notice that since τε\tau_{\varepsilon} acts merely on the elements of Im(Φε)Im(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) then we can not use directly the chain rule to differentiate the expression with respect to ε{\varepsilon}. Therefore, consider the maps τ:M×I𝒢\tau:M\times I\to{\mathcal{G}}, τ(x,ε):=τε(x)\tau(x,{\varepsilon}):=\tau_{\varepsilon}(x), and Φ:×I𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I\to{\mathcal{G}}, Φ(h,ε)=Φε(h)\Phi(h,{\varepsilon})=\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h), which codify the families of gauge maps and morphisms Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. Thus the map τΦ(,ε)=(τεΦε(),ε)\tau\cdot\Phi(\cdot,{\varepsilon})=(\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{\varepsilon}(\cdot),{\varepsilon}) contains all the information of the expression we want to differentiate. In order to differentiate this map, we will write it now in an equivalent way. Indeed, let ¯N¯\bar{{\mathcal{H}}}\rightrightarrows\bar{N} be the Lie groupoid which is the cartesian product of {\mathcal{H}} with II, ×IN×I{\mathcal{H}}\times I\rightrightarrows N\times I, and θ1,θ2:¯𝒢\theta_{1},\theta_{2}:\bar{{\mathcal{H}}}\to{\mathcal{G}} denote the maps

θ1(p):=m𝒢(τ(t(p)),Φ(p)) and θ2(p):=τ(s(p))1,\theta_{1}(p):=m_{\mathcal{G}}(\tau(t(p)),\Phi(p))\ \ \text{ and }\ \ \theta_{2}(p):=\tau(s(p))^{-1},

for p¯p\in\bar{{\mathcal{H}}}. Thus, we get that

τΦ=m𝒢(θ1×θ2).\tau\cdot\Phi=m_{\mathcal{G}}\circ(\theta_{1}\times\theta_{2}).

Therefore, we get the derivative with respect to ε{\varepsilon} by applying the differential of this map to the vector field /ε𝔛(¯)\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}\in\mathfrak{X}(\bar{{\mathcal{H}}}). That is,

d(τΦ)/ε=dm(dm(dτ(dt(/ε)),dΦ(dF(/ε))),di(dτ(ds(/ε)))),d(\tau\cdot\Phi)\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}=dm\left(dm(d\tau(dt(\partial/\partial{\varepsilon})),d\Phi(dF(\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}))),di(d\tau(ds(\partial/\partial{\varepsilon})))\right),

which, after a straightforward computation (see Theorem 1.4.14 in [32]), can be written as

(21) ddεΨε(p)=lσ1σ2(di(ddετε(s(p))))+rσ3lσ1(ddεΦε(p))lσ1σ2rσ3(ds(ε(Φε(p))))++rσ2σ3(ddετε(t(p)))lσ1rσ2σ3(dt(ε(Φε(p)))),\begin{split}\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Psi_{\varepsilon}(p)=&\;l_{\sigma_{1}\star\sigma_{2}}\left(di\left(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\tau_{\varepsilon}(s(p))\right)\right)+r_{\sigma_{3}}l_{\sigma_{1}}\left(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(p)\right)-l_{\sigma_{1}\star\sigma_{2}}r_{\sigma_{3}}(ds(\partial_{\varepsilon}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(p))))+\\ &+r_{\sigma_{2}\star\sigma_{3}}\left(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\tau_{\varepsilon}(t(p))\right)-l_{\sigma_{1}}r_{\sigma_{2}\star\sigma_{3}}(dt(\partial_{\varepsilon}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(p)))),\end{split}

where p¯p\in\bar{{\mathcal{H}}} and σ1\sigma_{1}, σ2\sigma_{2} and σ3\sigma_{3} are local bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} through τ(t(p))\tau(t(p)), Φ(p)\Phi(p) and τ(s(p))1\tau(s(p))^{-1}.

Therefore, for p=(h,0)×{0}p=(h,0)\in{\mathcal{H}}\times\{0\} we can choose σ1=u𝒢=σ3\sigma_{1}=u_{\mathcal{G}}=\sigma_{3}, and the previous equation becomes

(22) X0(h)X0(h)=rΦ0(h)(ddε|ε=0τε(t(h))dt(εΦε(h)))++lΦ0(h)(di(ddε|ε=0τε(s(h))ds(εΦε(h))))=δΦ0(α¯0)(h),\begin{split}X^{\prime}_{0}(h)-X_{0}(h)&=r_{\Phi_{0}(h)}\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\tau_{\varepsilon}(t(h))-dt(\partial_{\varepsilon}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right)+\\ &\ \ \ \ +l_{\Phi_{0}(h)}\left(di\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\tau_{\varepsilon}(s(h)\right)-ds(\partial_{\varepsilon}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)))\right)\\ &=\delta_{\Phi_{0}}(\bar{\alpha}_{0})(h),\end{split}

where α¯0Γ(ϕ0A𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{0}\in\Gamma(\phi_{0}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) is given by

α¯0(x)=ddε|ε=0τε(x)ddε|ε=0ϕε(x),for xN.\bar{\alpha}_{0}(x)=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\tau_{\varepsilon}(x)-\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\phi_{\varepsilon}(x),\ \ \text{for }x\in N.

That is, X0X^{\prime}_{0} and X0X_{0} are in the same cohomology class, as we wanted to prove. ∎

The 1-cocycle X0X_{0} is also called the infinitesimal deformation associated to the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, and XεX_{\varepsilon} will be called the deformation cocycle.

Remark 8.2.

Notice that if (Ψε,ψε)(\Psi_{\varepsilon},\psi_{\varepsilon}) is a trivial deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}, then equation (21) shows that every 1-cocycle XεX^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is exact. Alternatively, by using the rule chain, this can be checked by a direct computation as below.

ddε|ε=λ(τεΦ0)(h)\displaystyle\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0})(h) =ddε|ε=λm(τε(t(h))Φ0(h),τλ(s(h))1)\displaystyle=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}m\left(\tau_{{\varepsilon}}(t(h))\!\cdot\!\Phi_{0}(h),\tau_{{\lambda}}(s(h))^{-1}\right)
+ddε|ε=λm(τλ(t(h))Φ0(h),τε(s(h))1)\displaystyle+\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}m\left(\tau_{{\lambda}}(t(h))\!\cdot\!\Phi_{0}(h),\tau_{{\varepsilon}}(s(h))^{-1}\right)
=ddε|ε=λRΦ0(h)τλ(s(h))1(τε(t(h)))\displaystyle=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}R_{\Phi_{0}(h)\tau_{{\lambda}}(s(h))^{-1}}(\tau_{{\varepsilon}}(t(h)))
+ddε|ε=λLτλ(t(h))Φ0(h)(τε(s(h))1)\displaystyle+\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}L_{\tau_{\lambda}(t(h))\Phi_{0}(h)}(\tau_{{\varepsilon}}(s(h))^{-1})
=rτλΦ0(h)(ddε|ε=λ(τε(t(h))τλ(t(h))1))\displaystyle=r_{\tau_{{\lambda}}\cdot\Phi_{0}(h)}\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(\tau_{\varepsilon}(t(h))\cdot\tau_{\lambda}(t(h))^{-1})\right)
+lτλΦ0(h)[di(ddε|ε=λ(τε(s(h))τλ(s(h))1))].\displaystyle+l_{\tau_{{\lambda}}\cdot\Phi_{0}(h)}\left[di\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(\tau_{\varepsilon}(s(h))\cdot\tau_{\lambda}(s(h))^{-1})\right)\right].

Define the family of sections α¯εΓ(ψεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(\psi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{{\mathcal{G}}}) by

(23) α¯λ(x):=ddε|ε=λ(τε(x)τλ(x)1),for each λ.\bar{\alpha}_{{\lambda}}(x):=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\left(\tau_{{\varepsilon}}(x)\tau_{{\lambda}}(x)^{-1}\right),\ \ \text{for each }{\lambda}.

Therefore we get the exactness of the cocycles,

ddεΨε(h)=δτεΦ0(α¯ε)(h).\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Psi_{\varepsilon}(h)=\delta_{\tau_{{\varepsilon}}\cdot\Phi_{0}}(\bar{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}})(h).
Remark 8.3.

Since two deformations which are strongly equivalent are, in particular, equivalent then they determine the same cohomology class in Hdef1(Φ0)H^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{0}). Moreover, in a totally analogous way, one can prove that they determine the same cohomology class in the variation cohomology H~def1(Φ0)\tilde{H}^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{0}). In fact, it suffices considering a smooth family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} instead of the family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps of the previous proof and make τε=σεϕε\tau_{\varepsilon}=\sigma_{\varepsilon}\circ\phi_{\varepsilon}. Furthermore, for a smooth family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of bisections one can define the family αεΓ(A𝒢)\alpha_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}) of sections of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}}

αλ(φλ(x))=ddε|ε=λ(σε(x)σλ(x)1),\alpha_{\lambda}(\varphi_{\lambda}(x))=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\left(\sigma_{{\varepsilon}}(x)\sigma_{{\lambda}}(x)^{-1}\right),

for each λ{\lambda}, where φλ=tσλ\varphi_{\lambda}=t\circ\sigma_{\lambda}, and obtain, for a strongly trivial deformation, that

ddε|ε=λ(IσεΦ0)(h)=δIσλΦ0((φλϕ0)αλ)(h).\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0})(h)=\delta_{I_{\sigma_{{\lambda}}}\circ\Phi_{0}}((\varphi_{\lambda}\circ\phi_{0})^{*}\alpha_{{\lambda}})(h).

We remark this result in the following proposition.

Proposition 8.4.

Let Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} be a deformation of Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G}. Then, the corresponding cohomology class [X0][X_{0}] at time ε=0{\varepsilon}=0 in H~def1(Φ0)\tilde{H}^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{0}) depends only on the strong equivalence class of the deformation. Moreover, a strongly trivial deformation has exact cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} in the variation complex C~def(Φe)\tilde{C}_{def}(\Phi_{e}).

In order to prove the triviality of a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of Φ0\Phi_{0} by means of a Moser type argument, we will need not only that the cohomology class of the deformation cocycle vanishes, but that it vanishes in a smooth manner as we now explain.

Recall that a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of Φ0\Phi_{0} is a smooth map

×I\textstyle{{\mathcal{H}}\times I\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ\scriptstyle{\Phi}𝒢×I\textstyle{{\mathcal{G}}\times I\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}N×I\textstyle{N\times I\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}ϕ\scriptstyle{\phi}M×I\textstyle{M\times I}
Definition 8.1.

A family of cocycles XεCdef1(Φε)X_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) is smoothly exact if there exists a smooth section α¯ΓN×I(ϕA𝒢×I)\bar{\alpha}\in\Gamma_{N\times I}(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}\times I}) such that for each εI{\varepsilon}\in I, α¯ε=α¯(,ε)ΓN(ϕεA𝒢)=Cdef0(Φε)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}=\bar{\alpha}(\cdot,{\varepsilon})\in\Gamma_{N}(\phi^{*}_{\varepsilon}A_{\mathcal{G}})=C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) and

δΦε(α¯ε)=Xε.\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})=X_{\varepsilon}.

A family α¯εΓN(ϕεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma_{N}(\phi^{*}_{\varepsilon}A_{\mathcal{G}}) will be smooth if it can be encoded in a smooth section α¯ΓN×I(ϕA𝒢×I)\bar{\alpha}\in\Gamma_{N\times I}(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}\times I}) as above.

Equivalently, defining the morphism (Φ~,ϕ~):×I𝒢(\tilde{\Phi},\tilde{\phi}):{\mathcal{H}}\times I\to{\mathcal{G}}, which is the projection to 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} of Φ\Phi, the family α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}} is smooth if the section α~Γ(ϕ~A𝒢)\tilde{\alpha}\in\Gamma(\tilde{\phi}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) given by α~(x,ε):=α¯ε(x)\tilde{\alpha}(x,{\varepsilon}):=\bar{\alpha}_{{\varepsilon}}(x) is smooth.

Theorem 8.5.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of the morphism (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Then, Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial if and only if the family XεX_{\varepsilon} of cocycles is smoothly exact in Cdef(Φ0)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi_{0}).

Remark 8.6.

The smooth exactness condition of the family XεX_{\varepsilon} is just another way to say that each 1-cocycle Xε=ddεΦεCdef1(Φε)X_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}\in C_{def}^{1}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) is equal to δΦε(α¯ε)\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}}), where α¯ε\bar{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}} is a smooth family of 0-cochains in the sense of Definition 8.1.

Proof.

The smooth exactness of the cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} was already verified in Remark 8.2. We prove now the converse statement, where the goal is finding a smooth family of gauge-maps which verifies the triviality of the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. Assume that, for every εI{\varepsilon}\in I, Xε=δΦε(α¯ε)X_{\varepsilon}=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}), for α¯εΓ(ϕεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) such that α~(x,ε):=α¯ε(x)\tilde{\alpha}(x,{\varepsilon}):=\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}(x) is a smooth section in ΓN×I(ϕ~A𝒢)\Gamma_{N\times I}(\tilde{\phi}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) (see Definition 8.1 for the notations). We will define the family of gauge maps in terms of the flow of an appropriate vector field determined by the sections α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}.

Consider the vector field

(24) V(g,y,ε):=(rg(α~(y,ε)),0y,/ε),V(g,y,{\varepsilon}):=(r_{g}(\tilde{\alpha}(y,{\varepsilon})),0_{y},\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}),

defined on the fibered-product ϕ~𝒢:=𝒢t×ϕ~(N×I)\tilde{\phi}^{*}{\mathcal{G}}:={\mathcal{G}}\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}(N\times I) of the target map tt with the base map ϕ~\tilde{\phi}, as in the diagram below,

(25) 𝒢t×ϕ~(N×I){{\mathcal{G}}\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}(N\times I)}𝒢{{\mathcal{G}}}N×I{N\times I}M.{M.}pr𝒢\scriptstyle{\mathrm{pr}_{\mathcal{G}}}t\scriptstyle{t}ϕ~\scriptstyle{\tilde{\phi}}

This vector field is indeed well-defined since ddεΦε=δΦε(α¯ε)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}), and therefore ddεϕε=ρ(α¯ε)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\phi_{\varepsilon}=\rho(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}).

Lemma 8.7 below guarantees that the flow ψε\psi_{\varepsilon} of VV is defined for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I over the points of Mt×ϕ~N×{0}ϕ~𝒢.M\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}N\times\{0\}\subset\tilde{\phi}^{*}{{\mathcal{G}}}. Thus ψε\psi_{\varepsilon} defines the family of gauge maps (which projects to ϕ0\phi_{0})

τε:N𝒢;xpr𝒢(ψε(ϕ0(x),x,0)),\tau_{\varepsilon}:N\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}};\ \ x\longmapsto\mathrm{pr}_{\mathcal{G}}(\psi_{\varepsilon}(\phi_{0}(x),x,0)),

where pr𝒢:ϕ~𝒢𝒢\mathrm{pr}_{\mathcal{G}}:\tilde{\phi}^{*}{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} is the natural projection to 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} as in diagram (25) above. That is, the flow of VV over ϕ0(N)×N×{0}\phi_{0}(N)\times N\times\{0\} can be written as ψε(ϕ0(x),x,0)=(τε(x),x,ε)\psi_{\varepsilon}(\phi_{0}(x),x,0)=(\tau_{\varepsilon}(x),x,{\varepsilon}).

Claim: The family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} proves the triviality of Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, i.e., it holds Φε=τεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}.

We will prove this claim by showing that Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} and τεΦ0\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0} determine the same integral curves of a vector field ZZ defined below. For that, notice first that since ddεϕε=ρ(α¯ε)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\phi_{\varepsilon}=\rho(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}), then the curve ϕε(x)\phi_{\varepsilon}(x) belongs to a unique orbit of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Thus, for h𝒪h\in{\mathcal{H}}_{\mathcal{O}}, the curve εΦε(h){\varepsilon}\to\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h) lies inside the restriction groupoid 𝒢𝒪ϕ0(s(h)){\mathcal{G}}_{{\mathcal{O}}_{\phi_{0}(s(h))}}. That is, for any h𝒪h\in{\mathcal{H}}_{\mathcal{O}}, both curves εΦε(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h) and εIτεΦ0(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto I_{\tau_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h) are inside the restriction 𝒢𝒪{\mathcal{G}}_{{\mathcal{O}}^{\prime}}; where 𝒪:=𝒪ϕ0(s(h)){\mathcal{O}}^{\prime}:={\mathcal{O}}_{\phi_{0}(s(h))}. Therefore, we can consider the following fibered product

(26) B{B}𝒢t×ϕ~(𝒪×I){{\mathcal{G}}\ _{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}({\mathcal{O}}\times I)}𝒪×I{{\mathcal{O}}\times I}𝒪×I,{{\mathcal{O}}^{\prime}\times I,}s𝒢×prI\scriptstyle{s_{\mathcal{G}}\times pr_{I}}ϕ\scriptstyle{\phi}

which, by transversality of the maps involved in the diagram, will be well-defined. Let ZZ denote the vector field on BB defined by

Z(g,y,x,ε):=(rg(α~(y,ε))+lg(di(α~(x,ε))),0y,0x,/ε).Z(g,y,x,{\varepsilon}):=(r_{g}(\tilde{\alpha}(y,{\varepsilon}))+l_{g}(di(\tilde{\alpha}(x,{\varepsilon}))),0_{y},0_{x},\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}).

Then, for every h𝒪h\in{\mathcal{H}}_{\mathcal{O}}, ddεΦε(h)=δΦε(α~(,ε))(h)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}(-,{\varepsilon}))(h) and ddετεΦ0(h)=δτεΦ0(α~(,ε))(h)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}(h)=\delta_{\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}}(\tilde{\alpha}(-,{\varepsilon}))(h). It follows that (Φε(h),t(h),s(h),ε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h),t(h),s(h),{\varepsilon}) and (τεΦ0(h),t(h),s(h),ε)(\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}(h),t(h),s(h),{\varepsilon}) are integral curves of ZZ starting at the same point. Therefore, Φε(h)=τεΦ0(h)\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}(h), for every h𝒪h\in{\mathcal{H}}_{\mathcal{O}}. Since hh\in{\mathcal{H}} is arbitrary, it follows that Φε=τεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}.

Lemma 8.7.

Let VV be the vector field defined by equation (24) above. The flow ψε\psi^{{\varepsilon}} of VV is defined for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I over Mt×ϕ~N×{0}ϕ~𝒢.M\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}N\times\{0\}\subset\tilde{\phi}^{*}{{\mathcal{G}}}.

Proof.

Note that the vector field VV projects by the target map to a vector field a¯𝔛(Mt×ϕ~(N×I))\bar{a}\in\mathfrak{X}(M\;_{t}\times_{\tilde{\phi}}(N\times I)) 𝔛(N×I),\cong\mathfrak{X}(N\times I), given by

a¯(y,ε)=(ρ(α¯(y,ε)),0y,/ε)TMIdTM×dϕ~T(N×I).\bar{a}(y,{\varepsilon})=(\rho(\bar{\alpha}(y,{\varepsilon})),0_{y},\partial/\partial{\varepsilon})\in TM\;_{Id_{TM}}\!\times_{d\tilde{\phi}}T(N\times I).

It follows from the fact that ddεϕε=ρ(α¯ε)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\phi_{\varepsilon}=\rho(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}), that the integral curves of a¯\bar{a} are determined by the smooth family of base maps ϕε\phi_{\varepsilon}. Therefore they are defined for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I when starting at points of Mt×ϕ~N×{0}ϕ~𝒢M\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}N\times\{0\}\subset\tilde{\phi}^{*}{{\mathcal{G}}}. Thus, the proof now follows by an argument completely analogous to that of Theorem 3.6.4 in [32], which allows us to check that the flow ψε\psi^{\varepsilon} over Mt×ϕ~N×{0}ϕ~𝒢M\;_{t}\!\times_{\tilde{\phi}}N\times\{0\}\subset\tilde{\phi}^{*}{{\mathcal{G}}} is defined for the same time as the flow of a¯\bar{a}; i.e., for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I.

Remark 8.8.

It is straightforward to see that the previous result generalizes that of [10] concerning the triviality of deformations of Lie group homomorphisms.

Notice that one can use Theorem 8.5 and Proposition 3.11 to obtain as a direct consequence the following kind of characterization of strongly trivial deformations.

Theorem 8.9.

Let (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M) be a Lie groupoid morphism and (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}. Assume that ϕ0\phi_{0} is an injective immersion and NN is compact. Then, the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial if and only if the family of 1-cocycles Xε=ddεΦεX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{{\varepsilon}} is smoothly exact in Cdef(Φ0)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi_{0}).

The following theorem shows that with the help of the subcomplex C~def(Φ0)\tilde{C}^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi_{0}) is posible to obtain a cleaner characterization of the strongly trivial deformations.

Theorem 8.10.

Let (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M) be a Lie groupoid morphism and (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}. Assume that NN is compact. Then, the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial if and only if the family of 1-cocycles Xε=ddεΦεX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{{\varepsilon}} is smoothly exact in the subcomplex C~def(Φ)\tilde{C}^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi).

Proof.

If Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial, the smooth exactness of the family of 1-cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} was already proved in Remark 8.3. Conversely, let Xε=δΦε(ϕεαε)X_{\varepsilon}=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}), where αε\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is a family of sections of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}}, such that ϕεαε\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is a smooth family of sections in the sense of Definition 8.1.

Since NN is compact, ϕ(N×I)\phi(N\times I) is a closed subset inside M×IM\times I. Shrinking the interval II if necessary, let VUMV\subset U\subset M be open subsets with compact closure such that ϕ(N×I)V×I\phi(N\times I)\subset V\times I. Then we can extend the smooth family αε|U\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}|_{U} of restriction sections to a smooth family αε\alpha_{\varepsilon} of sections supported on UU such that αε|V=αε|V\alpha_{\varepsilon}|_{V}=\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}|_{V}.

Then, on the one hand, since αε=αε\alpha_{\varepsilon}=\alpha^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} over VV it follows that every cocycle XεX_{\varepsilon} is the pullback by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of the vector field δε(αε)𝔛(𝒢)\delta_{\varepsilon}(\alpha_{\varepsilon})\in\mathfrak{X}(\mathcal{G}). Indeed,

(27) Xε(h)=δ𝒢(αε)(Φε(h))=rΦε(h)(αε(tΦε(h)))+lΦε(h)(di(αε(sΦε(h))))=δ𝒢(αε)(Φε(h)).\begin{split}X_{{\varepsilon}}(h)&=\delta_{{\mathcal{G}}}(\alpha^{\prime}_{{\varepsilon}})(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}(h))\\ &=r_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)}\left(\alpha^{\prime}_{{\varepsilon}}(t\circ\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}(h))\right)+l_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)}\left(di(\alpha^{\prime}_{{\varepsilon}}(s\circ\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}(h)))\right)\\ &=\delta_{{\mathcal{G}}}(\alpha_{{\varepsilon}})(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}(h)).\end{split}

On the other hand, let σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} be the smooth family of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} induced, by the exponential flow, by the family of sections αε\alpha_{\varepsilon} as in the proof of Proposition 3.11. Note that such a family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} is defined for all ε{\varepsilon} small enough. Thus, by Remark 8.3,

(28) ddλ|λ=εIσλΦ0(h)=δ𝒢(αε)(IσεΦ0)(h).\frac{d}{d{\lambda}}|_{{\lambda}={\varepsilon}}I_{\sigma_{\lambda}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h)=\delta_{\mathcal{G}}(\alpha_{\varepsilon})(I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0})(h).

Therefore, in other words, by equations (27) and (28) one has that εΦε(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h) and εIσεΦ0(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h) are integral curves of the time-dependent vector field δ𝒢(αε)\delta_{\mathcal{G}}(\alpha_{\varepsilon}) passing through Φ0(h)𝒢\Phi_{0}(h)\in\mathcal{G} at time ε=0{\varepsilon}=0. That is, Φε(h)=IσεΦ0(h)\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h) for all ε{\varepsilon} small enough.

The triviality of the following special type of deformations is not hard to prove directly without using the cohomological tools of this section, nevertheless we will verify it as a consequence of the Theorem 8.5 above.

Example 8.11.

Let π:MM\pi:M\longrightarrow M^{\prime} be a surjective submersion. Assume that (F,f)(F,f) is a Lie groupoid morphism between {\mathcal{H}} and the submersion groupoid 𝒢=M×MM{\mathcal{G}}=M\times_{M^{\prime}}M and that (Fε,fε)(F_{\varepsilon},f_{\varepsilon}) is a deformation of FF. Then, FεF_{\varepsilon} is trivial if and only if πfε=πf0\pi\circ f_{\varepsilon}=\pi\circ f_{0}.

In fact, on the one hand, notice first that, since the Lie algebroid AM×MMA_{M\times_{M^{\prime}}M} of the submersion groupoid consists of the vertical vectors TπMT^{\pi}M of TMTM, then the family of elements α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} given by α¯ε(n):=(ddεfε(n),0fε(n))\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}(n):=(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}f_{\varepsilon}(n),0_{f_{\varepsilon}(n)}) is a family of 0-cochains in Cdef0(Fε)C^{0}_{def}(F_{\varepsilon}) if and only if πfε=πf0\pi\circ f_{\varepsilon}=\pi\circ f_{0} for all ε{\varepsilon}.

On the other hand, it is straightforward to check that every morphism (Fε,fε)(F_{\varepsilon},f_{\varepsilon}) is of the form Fε=(fεt,fεs)F_{\varepsilon}=(f_{\varepsilon}\circ t_{\mathcal{H}},f_{\varepsilon}\circ s_{\mathcal{H}}). Therefore, if for every hh\in{\mathcal{H}} and all ε{\varepsilon}, fε(h)f_{\varepsilon}(h) and f0(h)f_{0}(h) are in the same π\pi-fiber, then the family of 1-cocycles Xε=ddεFεX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}F_{\varepsilon} is smoothly transgressed by the family of 0-cochains α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}. And conversely, if Xε=ddεFεX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}F_{\varepsilon} is smoothly transgressed, then ddεfε(n)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}f_{\varepsilon}(n) must be a vector tangent to the π\pi-fibers, for all nNn\in N.

The previous example tells us that the family FεF_{\varepsilon} is trivial if and only if it preserves the correspondence, determined by F0F_{0}, between the leaves 𝒪\mathcal{H}_{\mathcal{O}} of the foliation by orbit-groupoids of \mathcal{H} and the leaves 𝒢𝒪\mathcal{G}_{\mathcal{O}} of 𝒢\mathcal{G}. That is, if for every hh\in\mathcal{H}, the curve εFε(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto F_{\varepsilon}(h) lies inside the restriction groupoid 𝒢𝒪s(F0(h))\mathcal{G}_{{\mathcal{O}}_{s(F_{0}(h))}}. The following proposition explores this idea for any Lie groupoid 𝒢\mathcal{G} (not only the submersion groupoid).

Proposition 8.12.

Let Φε:𝒢\Phi_{\varepsilon}:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} be a deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0} and assume that \mathcal{H} is proper. The deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial if, and only if, the curves εΦε(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h), hh\in\mathcal{H}, determined by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} lie inside the leaves of the foliation {𝒢𝒪x}xM\{\mathcal{G}_{{\mathcal{O}}_{x}}\}_{x\in M} by orbit-groupoids of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Proof.

If Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is a trivial deformation, then obviously the curve εΦε(h){\varepsilon}\mapsto\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h) lies inside a unique leaf because Φε(h)=τε(t(h))Φ0(h)τε(s(h))1\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)=\tau_{\varepsilon}(t(h))\Phi_{0}(h)\tau_{\varepsilon}(s(h))^{-1}, for a smooth family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps covering ϕ0\phi_{0}. Conversely, let Φ~:×I𝒢\tilde{\Phi}:\mathcal{H}\times I\to\mathcal{G} be the morphism such that restricted to ×{ε}\mathcal{H}\times\{{\varepsilon}\} is Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, as in Definition 8.1. Then, the family of 1-cocycles Xε=ddεΦεCdef1(Φε)X_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) can be encoded in a unique 1-cocycle X~Cdef1(Φ~)\tilde{X}\in C^{1}_{def}(\tilde{\Phi}) given by

X~(h,ε)\displaystyle\tilde{X}(h,{\varepsilon}) :=Φ~(/ε|(h,ε))\displaystyle:=\tilde{\Phi}_{*}(\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}|_{(h,{\varepsilon})})
=Xε(h).\displaystyle=X_{\varepsilon}(h).

And, X~\tilde{X} turns out to be exact if and only if the family XεX_{\varepsilon} is smoothly exact.

Now, since \mathcal{H} is a proper groupoid, it follows that H1(,ϕ~ι𝒢)H^{1}(\mathcal{H},\tilde{\phi}^{*}{\iota}_{\mathcal{G}}) is trivial and the sequence (16) above for the morphism Φ~\tilde{\Phi} becomes

(29) 00rHdef1(Φ~)s~Γ(ϕ~ν𝒢)invK.0\rightarrow 0\stackrel{{\scriptstyle r}}{{\longrightarrow}}H^{1}_{def}(\tilde{\Phi})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\tilde{s}}}{{\longrightarrow}}\Gamma(\tilde{\phi}^{*}\nu_{\mathcal{G}})^{inv}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle K}}{{\longrightarrow}}\cdots.

Moreover, due to the fact that X~\tilde{X} is always tangent to the orbit groupoids of 𝒢\mathcal{G} then X~\tilde{X} lies in the kernel of s~\tilde{s}. Therefore X~\tilde{X} is an exact cocycle which, by Theorem 8.5, says that Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is a trivial deformation. ∎

We can also apply our methods to study deformations which are trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, that is, those which consider also the group of outer automorphisms of a Lie groupoid. Additionally, in Subsection 8.1 below, we sketch other types of equivalences between deformations of morphisms which arise naturally.

Definition 8.2.

A deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of a Lie groupoid morphism Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} is said to be trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G} if there exist an open interval II containing 0 and smooth families Fε:𝒢𝒢F_{\varepsilon}:{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} of Lie groupoid automorphisms and τε:N𝒢\tau_{\varepsilon}:N\to\mathcal{G} of gauge maps over ϕ0\phi_{0} such that F0=Id𝒢F_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}}, τ0=ϕ0\tau_{0}=\phi_{0} and Φε=Fε(τεΦ0)\Phi_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}\circ(\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}) for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I. Analogously we say that Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} if there exists a smooth family σε:M𝒢\sigma_{\varepsilon}:M\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} of bisections of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} such that σ0=u𝒢\sigma_{0}=u_{\mathcal{G}} and Φε=FεIσεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}\circ I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0} for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I.

Remark 8.13.

Note that considering only outer automorphisms produces weakly trivial deformations Φε=FεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}\circ\Phi_{0} whose study is already include in the strongly trivial up to automorphisms deformations.

Recall that a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} induces a pull-back map Φ:Hdefk(𝒢)Hdefk(Φ)\mathrm{\Phi^{*}:H^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\to H^{k}_{def}(\Phi)}. The key to characterizing the previous types of deformations lies in studying the pre-image of the deformation cocycle of a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} through the pull-back map Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}, when it exists.

Definition 8.3.

We will say that a family [Xε]Hdef1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in H_{def}^{1}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1(𝒢)H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) if there exist smooth families of cocycles ZεCdef1(𝒢)Z_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) and of cochains α¯εCdef0(Φε)\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}\in C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) such that

Φε(Zε)=Xε+δΦε(α¯ε).\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}(Z_{\varepsilon})=X_{\varepsilon}+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}).

Analogously, considering the variated cohomology, we say that [Xε]H~def1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in\tilde{H}_{def}^{1}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1(𝒢)H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) if the sections α¯ε\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} are of the form ϕεαε\phi^{*}_{{\varepsilon}}\alpha_{\varepsilon}, for αεΓ(A𝒢)\alpha_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}).

The statements of the following two theorems concerning the two types of deformations in definition 8.2 are analogous to the statements of the Theorems 8.9 and 8.5 concerning strongly trivial and trivial deformations.

Theorem 8.14.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of the morphism (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that 𝒢\mathcal{G} is compact. Then, Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} if and only if [Xε][X_{\varepsilon}] has a smooth preimage by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*} in Hdef(𝒢)H^{\bullet}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is some interval containing the zero.

Proof.

Let Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} be a gauge trivial deformation up to automorphisms of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, that is, Φε=Fε(τεΦ0)\Phi_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}\circ(\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}), for smooth families FεF_{\varepsilon} of automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, with F0=Id𝒢F_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}}, and τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps with base ϕ0\phi_{0} such that τ0=ϕ0\tau_{0}=\phi_{0}. By applying ddε\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}} to both sides of the equation we obtain

Xε\displaystyle X_{\varepsilon} =ΦεZε+(Fε)δτεΦ0(α¯ε)\displaystyle=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon}+(F_{\varepsilon})_{*}\delta_{\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi_{0}}(\bar{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}})
=ΦεZε+δΦε(α~ε)\displaystyle=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon}+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}})

where α~ε=(Fε)(α¯ε)Cdef0(Φε)\tilde{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}}=(F_{\varepsilon})_{*}(\bar{\alpha}^{{\varepsilon}})\in C^{0}_{\mathrm{def}}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) and Zε:=dFεdεFε1Z_{\varepsilon}:=\frac{dF_{\varepsilon}}{d{\varepsilon}}\circ F^{-1}_{\varepsilon} is a smooth family of 1-cocycles in Cdef1(𝒢)C^{1}_{\mathrm{def}}({\mathcal{G}}). It follows that [Xε]=Φε[Zε][X_{\varepsilon}]=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}[Z_{\varepsilon}] for all ε{\varepsilon}.

Conversely, assume that

(30) Xε=ΦεZε+δΦε(α¯ε),X_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon}+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}),

for ZεZ_{\varepsilon} and α¯ε\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon} smooth families of elements in Zdef1(𝒢)Z^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) and Cdef0(Φε)C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), respectively. Let Fε=Φε,0F_{\varepsilon}=\Phi^{{\varepsilon},0} be the flow from time 0 to ε{\varepsilon} of the time dependent vector field ZεZ_{\varepsilon} on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Recall that every FεF_{\varepsilon} will be an automorphism of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. We claim that Φε=Fε1Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon} is a trivial deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}. That is, we will obtain a smooth family τε\tau_{\varepsilon} of gauge maps with base ϕ0\phi_{0}, starting at ϕ0\phi_{0}, such that Fε1Φε=IτεΦ0F_{\varepsilon}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon}=I_{\tau_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0} for ε{\varepsilon} small enough, concluding the proof.

On the one hand, taking α~εCdef0(Fε1Φε)\tilde{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}\in C^{0}_{def}(F_{\varepsilon}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon}) to be such that α¯ε=(Fε)(α~ε)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}=(F_{\varepsilon})_{*}(\tilde{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}), equation (30) becomes

(31) Xε=Φε(Zε)+δΦε((Fε)(α~ε))=Φε(Zε)+(Fε)(δFε1Φε(α~ε)).\begin{split}X_{\varepsilon}&=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}(Z_{\varepsilon})+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}((F_{\varepsilon})_{*}(\tilde{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}))\\ &=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}(Z_{\varepsilon})+(F_{\varepsilon})_{*}(\delta_{F_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}^{\varepsilon})).\end{split}

On the other hand, we set XεCdef1(Φε)X^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}) to be the family of deformation cocycles associated to the deformation Φε=Fε1Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}^{-1}\Phi_{\varepsilon} of Φ0\Phi_{0}. We will check that Xε=δΦε(α~ε)X^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=\delta_{\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}), i.e., XεX^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is smoothly exact. In fact,

ddε|ε=λΦε(h)=ddε|ε=λFε1(Φλ(h))+dFλ1(ddε|ε=λΦε(h)),\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}(h)=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}F_{\varepsilon}^{-1}(\Phi_{\lambda}(h))+dF_{\lambda}^{-1}(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h)),

from where it follows that

Xλ(h)\displaystyle X^{\prime}_{\lambda}(h) =dFλ1(Zλ(Φλ(h)))+dFλ1(Xλ(h))\displaystyle=-dF_{\lambda}^{-1}(Z_{\lambda}(\Phi_{\lambda}(h)))+dF_{\lambda}^{-1}(X_{\lambda}(h))
=dFλ1(ΦλZλ)(h)+dFλ1(Xλ)(h)\displaystyle=-dF_{\lambda}^{-1}(\Phi_{\lambda}^{*}Z_{\lambda})(h)+dF_{\lambda}^{-1}(X_{\lambda})(h)
=δΦλ(α~λ)(h),\displaystyle=\delta_{\Phi^{\prime}_{\lambda}}(\tilde{\alpha}^{\lambda})(h),

where the last equality follows from equation (31). It then follows from Theorem 8.5 that Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is trivial concluding the proof of the theorem. ∎

Analogously, adding the condition of Φ0\Phi_{0} to be an injective inmersion, the previous proof and Theorem 8.9 prove the following.

Theorem 8.15.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of the morphism (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that ϕ0\phi_{0} is an injective immersion and that NN and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} are compact. Then, Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G} if and only if the family [Xε][X_{\varepsilon}] of cohomology classes has a smooth preimage by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*} in Hdef(𝒢)H^{\bullet}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}).

Remark 8.16.

In particular, if the family XεX_{\varepsilon} of the previous Theorem is smoothly exact, then Theorem 8.9 shows that the family of automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G} can be taken as a family of inner automorphisms.

With a very similar proof to that of Theorem 8.14, we can consider the variated complex C~def(Φε)\tilde{C}_{def}^{*}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) and prove

Theorem 8.17.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of the morphism (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that 𝒢\mathcal{G} is compact. Then, Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} if and only if [Xε]H~def(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in\tilde{H}^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth preimage by Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*} in Hdef(𝒢)H^{\bullet}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is some interval containing the zero.

As a final result of this subsection we sketch an alternative characterization of these deformations under the weaker condition of smooth exactness on the cokernel complexes Coker(Φε)\mathrm{Coker}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}) of the pullback maps Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}. Given a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}, let X¯εCoker(Φε)\bar{X}_{\varepsilon}\in\mathrm{Coker}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}) denote the image of the cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} in the cokernel complex. The smooth exactness of the cocycles X¯ε\bar{X}_{\varepsilon} is defined following the philosophy that all the elements involved in the transgression of the family X¯ε\bar{X}_{\varepsilon} form smooth families.

Theorem 8.18.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of the morphism Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}. Assume that Φ0\Phi_{0} is a surjective submersion and that {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} are compact and connected. Then, the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G} if and only if the family of cocycles X¯ε\bar{X}_{\varepsilon} in Coker(Φε)\mathrm{Coker}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}) is smoothly exact.

Sketch of proof.

The exactness condition amounts to have

(32) Xε=ΦεZε+δΦε(α¯ε),X_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon}+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}),

for ZεZ_{\varepsilon} and α¯ε\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon} smooth families of elements in Cdef1(𝒢)C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) and Cdef0(Φε)C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), respectively. Let Fε=Φε,0F_{\varepsilon}=\Phi^{{\varepsilon},0} denote the flow from time 0 to ε{\varepsilon} of the time dependent vector field ZεZ_{\varepsilon} on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. A priori, every FεF_{\varepsilon} will be a diffeomorphism of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. However we claim that every FεF_{\varepsilon} is a morphism for all ε{\varepsilon} small enough.

Indeed, in order to prove the claim note that by applying δΦε\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}} to equation (32) we get

δΦε(ΦεZε)=0,\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon})=0,

which evaluating in arrows (g,h)(2)(g,h)\in{\mathcal{H}}^{(2)} shows us that ZεZ_{\varepsilon} is multiplicative on the image of Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}. Thus, since the morphism Φ0\Phi_{0} is assumed to be a surjective submersion then, by the compactness of {\mathcal{H}} and the connectedness of the groupoids, Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} will be a surjective submersion for all ε{\varepsilon} small enough. That is, every ZεZ_{\varepsilon} is multiplicative on 𝒢\mathcal{G}. Therefore one can follows now the proof of Theorem 8.14 to check that the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial up to automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}. The converse statement follows as in Theorem 8.14.

8.1. Additional remarks on triviality

The previous results take account of four notions of equivalences defined for deformations of morphisms. However, there are some other very natural types of deformations that can be considered. Here we briefly explain these notions and show how they fit in the framework of deformation complexes.

Definition 8.4.

We say that a deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} or strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left if there exist an open interval II around 0 and a smooth family Fε:F_{\varepsilon}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{H}} of automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} with F0=IdF_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{H}} and a smooth family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of bisections of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} with σ0=1𝒢\sigma_{0}=1_{\mathcal{G}} such that ΦεFε=IσεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}, for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I. Analogously a deformation is called trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} if there exists a smooth family Fε:F_{\varepsilon}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{H}} of automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} with F0=IdF_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{H}} and a smooth family τε:N𝒢\tau_{\varepsilon}:N\to\mathcal{G} of gauge maps over ϕ0\phi_{0} such that τ0=1𝒢ϕ0\tau_{0}=1_{\mathcal{G}}\circ\phi_{0} and ΦεFε=IτεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}=I_{\tau_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}, for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I.

Remark 8.19.

Deformations which are strongly trivial up to automorphisms on left are very much related to what should be called trivial deformations of Lie subgroupoids where it is required to deform the groupoid on left as well, and the family FεF_{\varepsilon} defines the type of deformations allowed. These deformations are studied in detail in [9].

The arguments used in the proof of Theorem 8.5 can also be applied to get results concerning the two types of deformations defined above. The following two results give conditions to characterize deformations which are strongly trivial up to automorphisms on left by using the usual deformation complex Cdef(Φε)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) and its variation C~def(Φε)\tilde{C}^{*}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}). In order to illustrate that, recall first that a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} induces a push-forward map (Φε):Hdef1()Hdef1(Φ)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}:H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\to H^{1}_{def}(\Phi).

Definition 8.5.

We will say that a family [Xε]Hdef1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in H_{def}^{1}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) if there exist smooth families of cocycles YεCdef1()Y_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) and α¯εCdef0(Φε)\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}\in C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) such that

Xε=(Φε)(Yε)+δΦε(α¯ε).X_{\varepsilon}=(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}(Y_{\varepsilon})+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}^{\varepsilon}).

Analogously, considering the variation C~def(Φε)\tilde{C}_{def}^{*}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), since C~def1(Φε)=Cdef1(Φε)\tilde{C}^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon})=C^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), we say that a family [Xε]H~def1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in\tilde{H}_{def}^{1}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) if there exist smooth families of cocycles YεCdef1()Y_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) and sections αεΓ(A𝒢)\alpha^{\prime}_{{\varepsilon}}\in\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}) such that

(33) Xε=(Φε)(Yε)+δΦε(ϕεαε).X_{\varepsilon}=(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}(Y_{\varepsilon})+\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\alpha_{\varepsilon}).
Theorem 8.20.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that {\mathcal{H}} is compact and ϕ0\phi_{0} is an injective immersion. Then Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} if and only if [Xε]Hdef1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in H^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) by (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*} for εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is an open interval containing 0.

Proof.

Since the proof of this theorem is completely analogous to the proof of the previous theorems, we will only sketch the main ingredients. Assume that

(34) XεδΦε(α¯ε)=(Φε)Yε,for all ε,X_{\varepsilon}-\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})=-(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}Y_{\varepsilon},\ \ \text{for all }{\varepsilon},

for smooth families α¯εCdef0(Φε)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in C^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) and YεZdef1()Y_{\varepsilon}\in Z^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}). Let FεF_{\varepsilon} denote the flow from time 0 to ε{\varepsilon} of the time dependent vector field YεY_{\varepsilon} on {\mathcal{H}}. Recall that since every YεY_{\varepsilon} is a 1-cocycle it follows that FεF_{\varepsilon} is a family of automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}}. Next we enunciate the key steps which prove the statement.

  • Shrinking II if necessary, use the injective immersive condition of ϕ0\phi_{0} to extend the sections α¯εΓ(ϕεA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}\in\Gamma(\phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) to a smooth time dependent section αε\alpha_{\varepsilon} in Γ(A𝒢)\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}}) which vanishes outside a compact set containing εIϕε(N)M\bigcup_{{\varepsilon}\in I}\phi_{\varepsilon}(N)\subset M. That is, αε\alpha_{\varepsilon} satisfies αε¯=Φεαε\bar{\alpha_{\varepsilon}}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\alpha_{\varepsilon}.

  • Consider the smooth family σε\sigma_{\varepsilon} of bisections of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} induced by the flow of the time dependent right-invariant vector field αε\overrightarrow{\alpha}_{\varepsilon} on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, and check that ΦεFε(h)=IσεΦ0(h)\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}(h)=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h), for all hh\in{\mathcal{H}}. This last part can be checked by showing that both sides are integral curves of the time dependent vector field δ(αε)\delta(\alpha_{\varepsilon}) on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} starting at the same point at the same time. Indeed, on the one hand, the derivative ddεIσεΦ0(h)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}(h) follows from Proposition 8.1; and on the other hand, the derivative ddεΦεFε(h)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}(h) is

    Xε(Fε(h))+dΦε(Yε(Fε(h)))\displaystyle X_{\varepsilon}(F_{\varepsilon}(h))+d\Phi_{\varepsilon}(Y_{\varepsilon}(F_{\varepsilon}(h))) =δΦε(α¯ε)(Fε(h))\displaystyle=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})(F_{\varepsilon}(h))
    =Φε(δ(αε))(Fε(h))\displaystyle=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}(\delta(\alpha_{\varepsilon}))(F_{\varepsilon}(h))
    =δ(αε)(ΦεFε(h)).\displaystyle=\delta(\alpha_{\varepsilon})(\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}(h)).

The proof of the converse statement is a direct computation after applying ddε\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}} to the left strongly trivial expression ΦεFε=IσεΦ0\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon}=I_{\sigma_{\varepsilon}}\circ\Phi_{0}. ∎

Analogously, we can avoid the injective immersive condition in the previous Theorem by considering the variation complex C~def(Φε)\tilde{C}^{*}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}).

Theorem 8.21.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that {\mathcal{H}} is compact. Then Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} if and only if [Xε]H~def1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in\tilde{H}^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) by (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*} for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is an open interval containing 0.

Proof.

The proof of this theorem follows the idea similar to that of the previous Theorem, however we now use the argument of extension of sections of the Theorem 8.10 to obtain the smooth family of global sections which give rise to the family of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G}. ∎

We remark that considering the cokernel complex Coker((Φε))\mathrm{Coker}((\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}) we get an equivalent result to that of Theorem 8.20. Indeed, let X¯εCoker((Φε))\bar{X}_{\varepsilon}\in\mathrm{Coker}((\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}) denote the image in the cokernel complex of the cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} associated to the deformation Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon}.

Theorem 8.22.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that {\mathcal{H}} is compact and ϕ0\phi_{0} is an injective immersion. Then Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} if and only if X¯ε\bar{X}_{\varepsilon} is smoothly exact for εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is an open interval containing 0.

Proof.

The proof of this theorem follows directly from the fact that, under the injectivity of the cochain maps (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}, the exactnees condition of the family of cocycles X¯ε\bar{X}_{\varepsilon} is equivalent to the existence of a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) by (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*} of the classes of XεX_{\varepsilon}. Thus, we will be able to use the same proof of Theorem 8.20. ∎

Remark 8.23.

In contrast, we can modify the cokernel complex Coker((Φε))Coker((\Phi_{{\varepsilon}})_{*}) in zero degree changing it by the 0-cochains C~def0(Φε)=Φε(Γ(A𝒢))\widetilde{C}_{def}^{0}(\Phi_{\varepsilon})=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}(\Gamma(A_{\mathcal{G}})) of the variation complex, and the exactness of the deformation cocycles in this modified cokernel complex will allow us to define a trivial deformation different from that of Theorem 8.21. Indeed, in this case, the exactness of the deformation cocycles in the complex is equivalent to get a strongly trivial up to diffeomorphisms on the left deformation. These deformations are totally analogous to the ones which are strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left, the only difference lies in taking a family of diffeomorphisms FεF_{\varepsilon} instead of a family of automorphisms of the Lie groupoid as in Definition 8.4.

As an application of the Theorem 8.21 we deduce now the particular case of 1-deformations of smooth maps of the Thom-Levine’s Theorem (see [23], p. 124) regarding the characterization of trivial kk-deformations of smooth functions between manifolds. In Section 9 we will get the full Thom-Levine’s Theorem as an instance of the deformation theory developed in this Section.

Example 8.24.

[Thom-Levine’s Theorem for 1-deformations] Note that smooth functions between manifolds are in 1-1 correspondence with morphisms between the associated pair groupoids. Indeed, these morphisms are of the form f×f:Pair(M)Pair(N)f\times f:\textrm{Pair}(M)\to\textrm{Pair}(N), where f:MNf:M\to N is a smooth function between manifolds. From this one also gets that an automorphism of a pair groupoid is totally determined by the corresponding diffeomorphism on the base manifold.

With this setting, one checks that the characterizing equation (33) of strongly trivial up to automorphisms deformations of morphisms between pair groupoids translates exactly to the condition which characterizes trivial deformations of smooth functions from the Thom-Levine Theorem. Indeed, if F:M×IN×IF:M\times I\to N\times I is a deformation of the smooth function ff, the characterizing condition given by Thom-Levine’s Theorem is described by the equation

(35) F(/t)=F(ζ)+F(η)+F(/t),F_{*}(\partial/\partial t)=F_{*}(\zeta)+F^{*}(\eta)+F^{*}(\partial/\partial t),

where ζ\zeta and η\eta are time-dependent vector fields on the source and target manifolds, respectively. The equivalence between equations (33) and (35) follows directly from the fact that 1-cocycles YCdef(𝒢)Y\in C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) (i.e. multiplicative vector fields) on a pair groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} are of the form

Y(p,q)=(ζ(p),ζ(q)),Y(p,q)=(\zeta(p),\zeta(q)),

where ζ\zeta is an usual vector field on the base of the pair groupoid.

Theorem 8.25.

Let (Φε,ϕε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon},\phi_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ0,ϕ0):(N)(𝒢M)(\Phi_{0},\phi_{0}):({\mathcal{H}}\rightrightarrows N)\longrightarrow({\mathcal{G}}\rightrightarrows M). Assume that {\mathcal{H}} is compact. Then Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} if and only if [Xε]Hdef1(Φε)[X_{\varepsilon}]\in H^{1}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}) has a smooth pre-image in Hdef1()H^{1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}}) by (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*} for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I, where II is an open interval containing 0.

Proof.

Assume that [Xε][X_{\varepsilon}] has smooth preimage by (Φε)(\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*} for all εI{\varepsilon}\in I. That is, equation (34) is satisfied. Then, following the notations of the proof of the Theorem above, define the deformation Φε=ΦεFε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\varepsilon} of Φ0\Phi_{0}. The proof is completed after checking that Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is a trivial deformation. In fact, observe first that the cocycles ddεΦεCdef1(Φε)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}) are smoothly exact, and this smooth exactness follows from equation (34). Therefore, the triviality of Φε\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon} is a consequence of Theorem 8.5. ∎

Remark 8.26.

Notice that, by considering the cokernel complex Cdef(Φε)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), one similarly checks that the smooth exactness of the cocycles, for all ε{\varepsilon} small enough, is equivalent to get a deformation which is trivial up to diffeomorphisms of {\mathcal{H}}.

As a final remark of this section, observe that all the notions of triviality defined here arise from the complexes and maps involved in the following diagram of exact sequences.

Cdef()\textstyle{C_{def}^{*}({\mathcal{H}})\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ\scriptstyle{\Phi_{*}}Cdef(𝒢)\textstyle{C_{def}^{*}({\mathcal{G}})\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ\scriptstyle{\Phi^{*}}Cdef(Φ)\textstyle{C_{def}^{*}(\Phi)\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}π1\scriptstyle{\pi_{1}}π2\scriptstyle{\pi_{2}}Coker(Φ)\textstyle{\mathrm{Coker(\Phi^{*})}}Coker(Φ)\textstyle{\mathrm{Coker(\Phi_{*})}}

Indeed we can summarizes the results as follows. On the vertical direction: under the injective immersive condition of the morphisms, the requirements on the deformation cocycles, regarding either existence of smooth pre-images or exactness on the cokernel complexes, turn out to be equivalent to characterize strongly trivial u.t.a.l. (up to automorphisms on the left) deformations (Theorems 8.20, 8.22). Under the non-injective immersive condition, the existence of smooth pre-image requirement gives us triviality up to automorphisms on the left (triviality u.t.a.l.), see Theorem 8.25. However the exactness of the cocycles on the cokernel complex, gives us triviality u.t.d.l. (up to diffeomorphisms on the left), see Remark 8.26.

Analogously, considering the variated complex C~def(Φ)\tilde{C}^{*}_{def}(\Phi) we can avoid the injective imersive requirement on the morphism and show that the existence of smooth pre-images condition gives us deformations which are strongly trivial u.t.a.l. (Theorem 8.21) and the exactness on a variation of the cokernel complex (using the 0-degree cochains C~def0(Φε)\widetilde{C}^{0}_{def}(\Phi_{\varepsilon})) gives us strongly trivial u.t.d.l. deformations (Remark 8.23).

On the horizontal direction, pre-image by the pullback gives deformations which are trivial up to automorphisms on the right (u.t.a.r.), see Theorem 8.14. By adding the injective immersive condition on the morphism, we obtain strongly trivial u.t.a.r. (see Theorem 8.15). Similarly, the weaker condition of exactness on the cokernel complex gives us deformations which are trivial u.t.a.r. after assuming surjectivity and submersion conditions on the morphism (Theorem 8.18).

Finally, regarding the variated complexes C~def(Φε)\tilde{C}_{def}^{*}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}), assuming the existence of smooth pre-images for the cocycles, we do not need to require the injective immersive condition on the morphism to prove the strong triviality u.t.a.r. of the deformation (see Theorem 8.17).

9. kk-deformations and Thom-Levine’s Theorem

In the previous sections we have studied 1-parameter deformations of morphisms or, in other words, paths of morphisms. The main point of this section is sketching the behaviour of deformations with kk parameters, that is, deformations depending on Ik=I××II^{k}=I\times\cdots\times I instead of just II, and to get as an application the Thom-Levine’s Theorem regarding triviality of kk-deformations of differentiable maps.

Definition 9.1.

Given a morphism Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}} and an interval II containing zero, a Lie groupoid morphism Φ:×Ik𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I^{k}\to{\mathcal{G}} such that Φ(,0,,0)=Φ0\Phi(\cdot,0,...,0)=\Phi_{0} will be called a kk-deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}. For every (ε1,,εk)Ik({\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k})\in I^{k} we denote by Φε1,,εk\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}} the morphism Φ(,ε1,,εk):𝒢\Phi(\cdot,{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}):{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}}.

The notions of triviality, strong triviality and all the other equivalences between deformations of the previous section are defined by taking kk-parameter families instead of 1-parameter families of the elements involved in the definitions. For instance, a kk-deformation Φ\Phi of Φ0\Phi_{0} is said to be trivial if there exists a smooth kk-parameters family τε1,,εk:N𝒢\tau_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}:N\to\mathcal{G} of gauge maps covering ϕ0:NM\phi_{0}:N\to M such that τ0,,0=ϕ0\tau_{0,...,0}=\phi_{0} and

Φε1,,εk=τε1,,εkΦ0.\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}=\tau_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\cdot\Phi_{0}.

Similarly a kk-deformation is called strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left if there exist smooth kk-parameters families Fε1,,εk:F_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{H}} and σε1,,εkBis(𝒢)\sigma_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\in\mathrm{Bis}(\mathcal{G}) of automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} and bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} such that F0,,0=IdF_{0,...,0}=Id_{\mathcal{H}}, σ0,,0=u𝒢\sigma_{0,...,0}=u_{\mathcal{G}} and

Φε1,,εkFε1,,εk=Iσε1,,εkΦ0,\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\circ F_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}=I_{\sigma_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}\circ\Phi_{0},

for all ε1,,εk{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k} small enough.

By fixing the first (k1)(k-1) components of IkI^{k}, say in a=(a1,,ak1)Ik1a=(a_{1},...,a_{k-1})\in I^{k-1}, in a kk-deformation Φ:×Ik𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I^{k}\to{\mathcal{G}}, one gets a 1-parameter family Φεa,k\Phi^{a,k}_{\varepsilon} which we call a canonical 1-deformation in Φ\Phi along the (canonical) direction eke_{k} of IkI^{k}. Similarly one defines the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi along the other canonical directions eie_{i} of IkI^{k}, for i=1,,k1i=1,...,k-1 and all ε1,,εk{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k} small enough.

Remark 9.1.

Notice that all the canonical 1-deformations in a trivial kk-deformation Φ\Phi are trivial but, on the other hand, all the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi along a specific direction, say e1e_{1}, might be trivial without implying that the whole kk-deformation Φ\Phi is trivial. In fact, as Theorem below shows, a necessary and sufficient condition for the triviality of Φ\Phi is that all the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi are trivial. Note also that, by Theorem 8.5, the triviality of all the canonical 1-deformations (in Φ\Phi) along e1e_{1} amounts to the existence of a section α¯1Γ(ϕA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}^{1}\in\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) (i.e., a kk-parameter family of sections α¯ε1,,εk1Γ(ϕε1,,εk(A𝒢))\bar{\alpha}^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\in\Gamma(\phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}^{*}(A_{\mathcal{G}}))) such that

Φe1=δΦ(α¯1),\frac{\partial\Phi}{\partial e^{1}}=\delta_{\Phi}(\bar{\alpha}^{1}),

or equivalently

Φε1,,εkε1=δΦε1,,εk(α¯ε1,,εk1),\frac{\partial\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}{\partial{\varepsilon}_{1}}=\delta_{\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}(\bar{\alpha}^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}),

for all (ε1,,εk)Ik({\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k})\in I^{k}.

Theorem 9.2.

Let Φ:×Ik𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I^{k}\to{\mathcal{G}} be a kk-deformation of Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}}. Then the deformation Φ\Phi is trivial if and only if the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi are trivial. That is, if and only if there exist kk kk-families α¯1,,α¯kΓ(ϕA𝒢)\bar{\alpha}^{1},...,\bar{\alpha}^{k}\in\Gamma(\phi^{*}A_{\mathcal{G}}) of sections, such that

(36) Φei=δΦ(α¯i),\frac{\partial\Phi}{\partial e^{i}}=\delta_{\Phi}(\bar{\alpha}^{i}),

for i=1,,ki=1,...,k and all ε1,,εk{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k} small enough.

Proof.

Assume that the canonical 1-deformations are trivial, and that τε1,,εk1\tau^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},…, τε1,,εkk\tau^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}} are the families of gauge maps, induced by the families of sections α¯ε1,,εk1\bar{\alpha}^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},…, α¯ε1,,εkk\bar{\alpha}^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}, which make the triviality along the canonical directions, that is, they hold

Φε1,,εk=τε1,,εkiΦε1,,εi1,0,εi+1,,εk,\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}=\tau^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\cdot\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{i-1},0,{\varepsilon}_{i+1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},

for every i=1,,ki=1,...,k. Then, it follows that

(37) Φε1,,εk=τε1,,εkkΦε1,,εk1,0=τε1,,εkkτε1,,εk1,0k1τε1,ε2,0,,02τε1,0,,01Φ0,\begin{split}\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}&=\tau^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\cdot\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k-1},0}\\ &=\tau^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\cdot\tau^{k-1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k-1},0}\cdots\tau^{2}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},{\varepsilon}_{2},0,...,0}\cdot\tau^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},0,...,0}\cdot\Phi_{0},\end{split}

proving that the kk-deformation Φ\Phi is trivial. The converse statement follows easily. ∎

Analogous to Theorem 8.21, to characterize kk-deformations which are strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left we consider the pre-images by (Φε1,,εk)(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}})_{*} of the deformation classes in H~def(Φε1,,εk)\tilde{H}_{def}^{*}(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}) of the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi.

Theorem 9.3.

Let Φ:×Ik𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\times I^{k}\to{\mathcal{G}} be a kk-deformation of Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\to{\mathcal{G}}, and assume that {\mathcal{H}} is compact. Then the deformation Φ\Phi is strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left if and only if the canonical 1-deformations in Φ\Phi are strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left. That is, if and only if there exist kk kk-families α1,,αkΓM×Ik(A𝒢)\alpha^{1},...,\alpha^{k}\in\Gamma_{M\times I^{k}}(A_{\mathcal{G}}) and Y1Y^{1},…, YkΓ×Ik(T)Y^{k}\in\Gamma_{{\mathcal{H}}\times I^{k}}(T{\mathcal{H}}) of sections of A𝒢A_{\mathcal{G}} and multiplicative vector fields on {\mathcal{H}}, such that

(38) Φε1,,εkεi=(Φε1,,εk)Yε1,,εki+δΦε1,,εk((Φε1,,εk)αε1,,εki),\frac{\partial\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}{\partial{\varepsilon}^{i}}=(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}})_{*}Y^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}+\delta_{\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}((\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}})^{*}\alpha^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}),

for i=1,,ki=1,...,k, and ε1,,εk{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k} small enough.

Proof.

Assume that equations (38) are satisfied by the kk-deformation Φ\Phi then, by Theorem 8.21, every canonical 1-deformation in Φ\Phi is strongly trivial up to automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}}. Let

σε1,,εk1,,σε1,,εkk andFε1,,εk1,,Fε1,,εkk\sigma^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},...,\sigma^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\ \ \text{ and}\ \ \ F^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},...,F^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}

denote the families of bisections of 𝒢\mathcal{G} and automorphisms of {\mathcal{H}} induced, respectively, by the families of sections αε1,,εk1\alpha^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},…, αε1,,εkk\alpha^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}} and vector fields Yε1,,εk1Y^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},…, Yε1,,εkkY^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}. Then, they hold

Φε1,,εkFε1,,εki=Iσε1,,εkiΦε1,,εi1,0,εi+1,,εk,\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\circ F^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}=I_{\sigma^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}\circ\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{i-1},0,{\varepsilon}_{i+1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}},

for every i=1,,ki=1,...,k. Hence, it follows that

(39) Φε1,,εk=Iσε1,,εkkΦε1,,εk1,0(Fε1,,εkk)1=Iσε1,,εkkIσε1,0,,01Φ(0,,0)(Fε1,,εkkFε1,0,,01)1,\begin{split}\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}&=I_{\sigma^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}\circ\Phi_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k-1},0}\circ\left(F^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\right)^{-1}\\ &=I_{\sigma^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}\circ\cdots\circ I_{\sigma^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},0,...,0}}\circ\Phi_{(0,...,0)}\circ\left(F^{k}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\circ\cdots\circ F^{1}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},0,...,0}\right)^{-1},\end{split}

which proves the strong triviality u.t.a.l. of Φ\Phi. The converse statement follows directly in a similar way to that of the triviality case in the previous theorem. ∎

Remark 9.4.

Note that the proofs of the previous two theorems can be seen as an application of a zig-zag principle where we go through each of the canonical directions checking the triviality one by one.

Remark 9.5.

Notice that, using this zig-zag principle, we can state analogous results for kk-deformations considering all the other type of "trivial" deformations defined in the previous section. In fact, as in the previous two theorems, which imitate the corresponding comological equations of Theorems 8.5 and 8.21 in the Section above, we get then a set of kk cohomological equations imitating the respective 1-parameter ones which characterize each type of deformation.

We next consider the notion of kk-deformations of smooth maps necessary for the statement of the Thom-Levine Theorem which we establish below as well. After that we will see that the Thom-Levine Theorem is just a particular case of the Theorem 9.3 above.

Let f0:MNf_{0}:M\to N be a smooth map between the manifolds MM and NN. The smooth kk-family f:M×IkN\mathrm{f:M\times I^{k}\to N} of maps between the manifolds is called a kk-deformation of f0f_{0} if f(,(0,,0))=f0f(\cdot,(0,...,0))=f_{0}. We will also refer to the kk-family ff by its restrictions fε1,,εk:=f(,ε1,,εk)f_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}:=f(\cdot,{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}). The deformation ff is said to be trivial if there exist kk-deformations Fε1,,εk:MMF_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}:M\to M and Gε1,,εk:NNG_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}:N\to N of the identity maps IdMId_{M} and IdNId_{N} such that

(40) fε1,,εkFε1,,εk=Gε1,,εkf0,f_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\circ F_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}=G_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\circ f_{0},

for all ε1,,εk{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k} small enough. The following version of Thom-Levine’s Theorem we take from ([23], p.124).

Theorem 9.6 (Thom-Levine’s Theorem).

Let f:M×IkNf:M\times I^{k}\to N be a kk-deformation of f0:MNf_{0}:M\to N, and assume that MM is compact. Then ff is trivial if and only if there exist smooth families ζε1,,εki𝔛(M)\zeta^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\in\mathfrak{X}(M) and ηε1,,εki𝔛(N)\eta^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}\in\mathfrak{X}(N) of vector fields on MM and NN (for i=1,,ki=1,...,k) such that

(41) fε1,,εkεi=(dfε1,,εk)(ζε1,,εki)+fε1,,εk(ηε1,,εki),\frac{\partial f_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}}{\partial{\varepsilon}_{i}}=(df_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}})(\zeta^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}})+f^{*}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}(\eta^{i}_{{\varepsilon}_{1},...,{\varepsilon}_{k}}),

for i=1,,ki=1,...,k.

Remark 9.7.

Notice that when considering 1-deformations, as in Example 8.24, equations (41) are just another way to express equation (35).

Remark 9.8.

We remark that Theorem 9.3 turns out to be a generalization to Lie groupoids of the Thom-Levine Theorem, more precisely, one checks that the Thom-Levine Theorem identifies exactly with the Theorem 9.3 applied to morphisms between pair groupoids. Indeed, similar to Example 8.24, which considers 1-deformations, a kk-deformation of a morphism between two pair groupoids amounts to a kk-deformation of smooth maps and, also, a strongly trivial up to automorphisms on the left deformation of a morphism between pair groupoids is equivalent to a trivial kk-deformation of the corresponding smooth map between the base manifolds of the pair groupoids. And additionally, the equations (38) translate exactly to the equations (41), where this matching follows directly from the fact that 1-cocycles ZCdef(𝒢)Z\in C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) (i.e. multiplicative vector fields) on a pair groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} are of the form

Z(p,q)=(ζ(p),ζ(q)),Z(p,q)=(\zeta(p),\zeta(q)),

where ζ\zeta is an usual vector field on the base of the pair groupoid.

Remark 9.9.

The Thom-Levine Theorem is a supporting step in order to prove the equivalence between the stability and the infinitesimal stability of smooth maps ([23], p. 127). Heuristically, the original proof of Thom-Levine Theorem and ours are very similar, consisting in integrate certain vector fields to get the triviality of the deformation out of these integrations, however our proof using Lie groupoids turns out to be more straightforward and geometrical, no needing so many technical details and also obtaining the necessity condition for triviality directly (and with a fast computation) as a velocity interpretation of the deformation. In summary, to get the Thom-Levine Theorem, we have directly used Theorems 9.3, 8.21, 8.10 and Proposition 8.4.

10. Stability of morphisms

In this section we apply the results obtained in the Section 8 in order to obtain stability properties of Lie groupoid morphisms under deformations. The key fact in the proof of the results below will be to combine the vanishing results (to get smooth transgressions of the deformation cocycles) with the Moser type arguments explored in Section 8.

Theorem 10.1.

Let Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism. Assume that 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is transitive. If either the groupoid {\mathcal{H}} is proper or 𝒢\mathcal{G} has trivial isotropy (i.e. 𝒢\mathcal{G} is a pair groupoid!), then any deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0} is trivial.

Proof.

Following the notations of Definition 8.1, let (Φ~,ϕ~):×I𝒢(\tilde{\Phi},\tilde{\phi}):{\mathcal{H}}\times I\to{\mathcal{G}} be a deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0}. On the one hand, since the groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is transitive, it follows that the normal bundle ν𝒢\nu_{{\mathcal{G}}} becomes the null bundle over MM. That fact implies that the 1-cocycle X~:=Φ~(/ε)Cdef1(Φ~)\tilde{X}:=\tilde{\Phi}_{*}(\partial/\partial{\varepsilon})\in C^{1}_{def}(\tilde{\Phi}) (see the proof of Proposition 8.12, where this cocycle is defined), corresponding to the deformation Φ~\tilde{\Phi}, lies in the kernel H1(×I,ϕ~𝔦𝒢)H^{1}({\mathcal{H}}\times I,\tilde{\phi}^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}}) of the map s~:Hdef1(Φ~)Γ(ϕ~ν𝒢)inv\tilde{s}:H^{1}_{def}(\tilde{\Phi})\to\Gamma(\tilde{\phi}^{*}\nu_{{\mathcal{G}}})^{\mathrm{inv}} of the sequence (16) in Section 6. On the other hand, the condition of either trivial isotropy of 𝒢\mathcal{G} or properness of {\mathcal{H}} implies that H1(×I,ϕ~𝔦𝒢)H^{1}({\mathcal{H}}\times I,\tilde{\phi}^{*}\mathfrak{i}_{\mathcal{G}}) vanishes. Hence, the 1-cocycle X~Cdef1(Φ~)\tilde{X}\in C^{1}_{def}(\tilde{\Phi}) is exact, which amounts to the smooth exactness of the family of 1-cocycles Xε=ddεΦεX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\Phi_{\varepsilon} associated to the deformation. Thus, the Theorem 8.5 concludes the proof. ∎

Additionally, by using either the Proposition 3.11 or Theorem 8.9, we then obtain:

Corollary 10.2.

Let Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism whose base map is an injective immersion. Assume that 𝒢\mathcal{G} is transitive. If the groupoid {\mathcal{H}} is compact, then any deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0} is strongly trivial.

Corollary 10.3.

Let Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism whose base map is an injective immersion. Assume that 𝒢\mathcal{G} is transitive and that the base NN of \mathcal{H} is compact. If the groupoid 𝒢\mathcal{G} has trivial isotropy, then any deformation of Φ0\Phi_{0} is strongly trivial.

Thus, Theorem 10.1 says that under properness and transitivity of \mathcal{H} and 𝒢\mathcal{G}, respectively, any curve εΦε{\varepsilon}\mapsto\Phi_{\varepsilon}, with Φ0=Φ\Phi_{0}=\Phi, is constant when viewed in the category of Lie groupoids and isomorphism classes of morphisms. Moreover, such conditions of compactness and transitivity assumed in the results are fundamental: for instance, any curve passing through more than one orbit of 𝒢\mathcal{G} determines a non-trivial deformation for a constant morphism Φ0\Phi_{0}. It also follows that if we additionally take {\mathcal{H}} as being a compact Lie group, then the base map of Φ0\Phi_{0} is an injective immersion but the deformation will not be strongly trivial; thus the transitivity of 𝒢\mathcal{G} is also necessary in the corollaries. Also for {\mathcal{H}} non-compact in Corollary 10.2, one can check that if 𝒢=2\mathcal{G}=\mathbb{R}^{2} and =\mathcal{H}=\mathbb{R} viewed as Lie groups, then the inclusions iε(x)=(x,(1ε)x)i_{{\varepsilon}}(x)=(x,(1-{\varepsilon})x) of the linear spaces in 2\mathbb{R}^{2} yield a non-strongly trivial deformation even if 𝒢\mathcal{G} is transitive. Considering now the last corollary, this latter counterexample also verifies that the trivial isotropy condition can not be removed in the statement. Additionally, assuming that NN is non-compact, take 𝒢=Pair()=\mathcal{G}=Pair(\mathbb{R})={\mathcal{H}} the pair groupoids over \mathbb{R}, since the identity map over \mathbb{R} can be deformed, by using a bump function, to not be a diffeomorphism for any ε{\varepsilon} small, it follows that it induces a non-strongly trivial deformation of the identity morphism.

11. Simultaneous deformations

In this section we put together the deformation theory of both Lie groupoids and Lie groupoid morphisms in order to study the most general deformation problem: the simultaneous deformation of the triple given by Φ𝒢\mathcal{H}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi}}{{\longrightarrow}}\mathcal{G}, where Φ\Phi is a morphism of Lie groupoids.

Definition 11.1.

Let Φ0:𝒢\Phi_{0}:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} be a Lie groupoid morphism. A deformation of the triple (,Φ0,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi_{0},\mathcal{G}) is a deformation ~\tilde{\mathcal{H}} of \mathcal{H} and a deformation 𝒢~\tilde{\mathcal{G}} of 𝒢\mathcal{G} over a common open interval II containing 0, and a morphism Φ~:~𝒢~\tilde{\Phi}:\tilde{\mathcal{H}}\to\tilde{\mathcal{G}} which deforms Φ0\Phi_{0} in a compatible manner, in the sense that Φ~|~0=Φ0\tilde{\Phi}|_{\tilde{\mathcal{H}}_{0}}=\Phi_{0} and, for each εI{\varepsilon}\in I, Φε:=Φ~|~ε:~ε𝒢~ε\Phi_{\varepsilon}:=\tilde{\Phi}|_{\tilde{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}}:\tilde{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}\to\tilde{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon} is a morphism of Lie groupoids. We will denote a deformation of the triple (,Φ0,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi_{0},\mathcal{G}) by (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(\mathcal{H}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},\mathcal{G}_{\varepsilon}).

Definition 11.2.

Let (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(\mathcal{H}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},\mathcal{G}_{\varepsilon}) and (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(\mathcal{H}^{\prime}_{\varepsilon},\Phi^{\prime}_{\varepsilon},\mathcal{G}^{\prime}_{\varepsilon}) be two deformations of the triple (,Φ,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi,\mathcal{G}). We will say that both deformations are equivalent if there exist an open interval II containing 0 and isomorphisms of Lie groupoids F~:~~\tilde{F}:\tilde{\mathcal{H}}\to\tilde{\mathcal{H}}^{\prime}, G~:𝒢~𝒢~\tilde{G}:\tilde{\mathcal{G}}\to\tilde{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} and a gauge map τ:N~𝒢~\tau:\tilde{N}\to\tilde{\mathcal{G}} covering ϕ:N~M~\phi:\tilde{N}\to\tilde{M} defined over II such that

(42) G1ΦF=τΦ.G^{-1}\circ\Phi^{\prime}\circ F=\tau\cdot\Phi.

We will also say that a deformation (~,Φ,𝒢~)(\tilde{\mathcal{H}},\Phi,\tilde{\mathcal{G}}) of (,Φ0,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi_{0},\mathcal{G}) is trivial if it is equivalent to the constant deformation (×I,Φ0×Id,𝒢×I)(\mathcal{H}\times I,\Phi_{0}\times Id,\mathcal{G}\times I).

Remark 11.1.

On rigidity of triples it is straighforward checking, from the rigidity of compact Lie groupoids and Lie groupoid morphisms from Section 10, that if \mathcal{H} and 𝒢\mathcal{G} are compact Lie groupoids, and moreover 𝒢\mathcal{G} is transitive then any deformation Φ~:~𝒢~\tilde{\Phi}:\tilde{\mathcal{H}}\to\tilde{\mathcal{G}} of the triple Φ:𝒢\Phi:\mathcal{H}\to\mathcal{G} is trivial.

Remark 11.2.

For deformations of the triple (,Φ0,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi_{0},\mathcal{G}) we can also define strongly equivalent deformations. This equivalence relation corresponds to the special case in which the gauge map τ\tau of equation (42) is induced by a bisection σ\sigma of 𝒢~\tilde{\mathcal{G}}. That is, when τ=σϕ\tau=\sigma\circ\phi, for σBis(𝒢~)\sigma\in\mathrm{Bis}(\tilde{\mathcal{G}}). A deformation will be called strongly trivial if it is strongly equivalent to the constant deformation.

11.1. Deformation complex and triviality of simultaneous deformations

Consider the diagram of cochain maps explained in Remark 4.1

Cdefk()ΦCdefk(Φ)ΦCdefk(𝒢).C_{def}^{k}({\mathcal{H}})\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi_{*}}}{{\longrightarrow}}C_{def}^{k}(\Phi)\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi^{*}}}{{\longleftarrow}}C_{def}^{k}({\mathcal{G}}).

We construct the complex which controls the deformations of the triple Φ𝒢{\mathcal{H}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi}}{{\longrightarrow}}{\mathcal{G}} by taking the cone of this diagram as follows. Take the mapping-cone complex associated to the cochain map Φ\Phi_{*},

(43) C(Φ)=Cdef+1()Cdef(Φ)C^{*}(\Phi_{*})=C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)

with differential δC(Φ)(c,Y)=(δc,ΦcδΦY)\delta_{C(\Phi_{*})}(c,Y)=\left(\delta_{{\mathcal{H}}}c,\ \Phi_{*}c-\delta_{\Phi}Y\right). Notice that the map Φ\Phi^{*} above induces a cochain map Φ~:Cdef(𝒢)C(Φ)\tilde{\Phi}^{*}:C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\longrightarrow C^{*}(\Phi_{*}) putting zero on the first component, Φ~:c(0,(1)deg(c)c)\tilde{\Phi}^{*}:c\longmapsto(0,(-1)^{deg(c)}c). Take now the mapping-cone associated to Φ~\tilde{\Phi}^{*}, getting the deformation complex of the triple,

Cdef+1(,Φ,𝒢):=Mapping(Φ~)=C(Φ)Cdef+1(𝒢)=Cdef+1()Cdef(Φ)Cdef+1(𝒢),\begin{split}C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}})&:=\mathrm{Mapping}(\tilde{\Phi}^{*})=C^{*}(\Phi_{*})\oplus C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\\ &=C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\oplus C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}),\end{split}

with differential δ(c,X,c¯)=(δc,δΦ(X)Φc+(1)deg(c¯)Φc¯,δ𝒢c¯)\delta(c,X,\bar{c})=\left(-\delta_{{\mathcal{H}}}c,\delta_{\Phi}(X)-\Phi_{*}c+(-1)^{deg(\bar{c})}\Phi^{*}\bar{c},\delta_{{\mathcal{G}}}\bar{c}\right).

In this way, given a ss-constant deformation (εΦε𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi_{\varepsilon}}}{{\longrightarrow}}{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) of (,Φ,𝒢)({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}}) (i.e., those where ε\mathcal{H}_{\varepsilon} and 𝒢ε\mathcal{G}_{\varepsilon} are ss-constant deformations), by computations similar to those in Proposition 8.1, we get that (ξ,X,ξ𝒢)(\xi_{\mathcal{H}},-X,\xi_{\mathcal{G}}) is a 2-cocycle in Cdef(,Φ,𝒢)C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}}), where ξ\xi_{\mathcal{H}} and ξ𝒢\xi_{\mathcal{G}} are the respective deformation cocycles for {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, and X:=ddε|ε=0ΦεX:=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\Phi_{\varepsilon} is the usual cochain (Section 8) associated to a deformation of morphisms. Indeed, the fact that (ξ,X,ξ𝒢)(\xi_{\mathcal{H}},-X,\xi_{\mathcal{G}}) is a cocycle follows by applying ddε|ε=0\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0} to the compatibility of the deformation (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}):

ddε|ε=0Φε(m¯ε(gh,h))\displaystyle\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\Phi_{\varepsilon}(\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}}(gh,h)) =ddε|ε=0m¯𝒢ε(Φε(gh),Φε(h))\displaystyle=\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}=0}\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}(gh),\Phi_{\varepsilon}(h))
\displaystyle\Longleftrightarrow X(g)+Φξ(g,h)\displaystyle X(g)+\Phi_{*}\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}}(g,h) =ξ𝒢(Φ(g),Φ(h))+dm¯𝒢(X(gh),X(h))\displaystyle=\xi_{{\mathcal{G}}}(\Phi(g),\Phi(h))+d\bar{m}_{{\mathcal{G}}}(X(gh),X(h))
\displaystyle\Longleftrightarrow δΦ(X)+ΦξΦξ𝒢\displaystyle\delta_{\Phi}(X)+\Phi_{*}\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}}-\Phi^{*}\xi_{{\mathcal{G}}} =0.\displaystyle=0.

The fact that the corresponding cohomology class of (ξ,X,ξ𝒢)(\xi_{\mathcal{H}},-X,\xi_{\mathcal{G}}) only depends on the equivalence class of the deformation is also an analogous computation.

Remark 11.3.

One can also consider a non ss-constant deformation (~,Φ~,𝒢~)(\tilde{\mathcal{H}},\tilde{\Phi},\tilde{\mathcal{G}}) of the triple (,Φ,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi,\mathcal{G}) and obtain its associated deformation cohomology class. Indeed, if X~𝔛(~)\tilde{X}_{\mathcal{H}}\in\mathfrak{X}(\widetilde{\mathcal{H}}) and X~𝒢𝔛(𝒢~)\tilde{X}_{\mathcal{G}}\in\mathfrak{X}(\widetilde{\mathcal{G}}) are transversal vector fields (i.e., vector fields which project to /ε𝔛(I)\partial/\partial{\varepsilon}\in\mathfrak{X}(I)) with ξCdef2()\xi_{\mathcal{H}}\in C^{2}_{def}(\mathcal{H}) and ξ𝒢Cdef2(𝒢)\xi_{\mathcal{G}}\in C^{2}_{def}(\mathcal{G}) being the corresponding deformation cocycles, then (ξ,X,ξ𝒢)Cdef2(,Φ,𝒢)(\xi_{\mathcal{H}},X,\xi_{\mathcal{G}})\in C^{2}_{def}(\mathcal{H},\Phi,\mathcal{G}) is the associated deformation cocycle, where X:=Φ~X~|Φ~X~𝒢|Cdef1(Φ)X:=\tilde{\Phi}_{*}\tilde{X}_{\mathcal{H}}|_{\mathcal{H}}-\tilde{\Phi}^{*}\tilde{X}_{\mathcal{G}}|_{\mathcal{H}}\in C^{1}_{def}(\Phi).

We pass now to establish the main results concerning simultaneous ss-constant deformations.

Theorem 11.4.

Let (ε,(Φε,ϕε),𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}},\phi_{\varepsilon}),{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ𝒢)({\mathcal{H}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi}}{{\longrightarrow}}{\mathcal{G}}), with {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} compact. If the family of associated cocycles (ξε,Xε,ξ𝒢ε)Cdef2(ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}},-X_{\varepsilon},\xi_{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}})\in C_{def}^{2}({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) is transgressed by a smooth family of cochains (Yε,α~ε,Zε)Cdef1(ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(Y_{\varepsilon},\tilde{\alpha}_{\varepsilon},Z_{\varepsilon})\in C_{def}^{1}({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}), then the deformation (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{{\varepsilon}},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) is trivial.

Proof.

Exactness of the family of cocycles amounts to

(44) ξε=δεYε;Xε=δΦε(α~ε)ΦYεΦZε;ξ𝒢ε=δ𝒢εZε.\begin{split}\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}}&=-\delta_{{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}}Y_{\varepsilon};\\ -X_{\varepsilon}&=\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})-\Phi_{*}Y_{\varepsilon}-\Phi^{*}Z_{\varepsilon};\\ \xi_{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}}&=\delta_{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}}Z_{\varepsilon}.\\ \end{split}

By the first and third equation, if φε\varphi_{\varepsilon} and ψε\psi_{\varepsilon} are the time-dependent flows starting at zero of the vector fields {Yε}\{-Y_{\varepsilon}\} and {Zε}\{Z_{\varepsilon}\} respectively, then they define the equivalences with the corresponding constant deformations of Lie groupoids. We claim that these equivalences can be used to prove the triviality of (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{{\varepsilon}},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}). In fact, by using Theorem 8.5, we will show that the family of morphisms {fε:=ψε1Φεφε}\{f_{\varepsilon}:=\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}\} is a trivial deformation in the sense of the definition at the beginning of Section 3. Such a family satisfies,

ddεfε(h)=(ddεψε1)(Φεφε(h))+dψε1(Xε(φε(h)))d(ψε1Φε)(Yε(φε(h)))=dψε1(Zε(Φεφε(h)))+dψε1(Xε(φε(h)))dψε1[dΦε(Yε(φε(h)))]=dψε1[Xε(φε(h))((Φε)Yε)(φε(h))(ΦεZε)(φε(h))]=dψε1(δΦε(α~ε)(φε(h))),by equations (44)=dψε1(δΦεφε(α¯ε)(h))(by α¯ε=φεα~ε)=δψε1Φεφε(αε)(h)(by αε=(ψε1)α¯ε)=δfε(αε)(h),\begin{split}\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}f_{\varepsilon}(h)&=\left(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\right)(\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))+d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}(X_{\varepsilon}(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h)))-d(\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon})\left(Y_{\varepsilon}(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right)\\ &=-d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left(Z_{\varepsilon}(\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right)+d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left(X_{\varepsilon}(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right)-d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left[d\Phi_{\varepsilon}\left(Y_{\varepsilon}(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right)\right]\\ &=d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left[X_{\varepsilon}(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))-((\Phi_{\varepsilon})_{*}Y_{\varepsilon})_{(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))}-(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}}^{*}Z_{\varepsilon})_{(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))}\right]\\ &=-d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left(\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}}(\tilde{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})(\varphi_{\varepsilon}(h))\right),\ \ \ \ \text{by equations }\eqref{eq:transgresionequations}\\ &=-d\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\left(\delta_{\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}}(\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})(h)\right)\ \ \ (\text{by }\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon}=\varphi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\tilde{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})\\ &=-\delta_{\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}}(\alpha_{\varepsilon})(h)\ \ \ (\text{by }\alpha_{\varepsilon}=-(\psi^{-1}_{\varepsilon})_{*}\bar{\alpha}_{\varepsilon})\\ &=\delta_{f_{\varepsilon}}(\alpha_{\varepsilon})(h),\end{split}

where the second equality follows from the fact that

(ddεψε1)(ψε(h))+dψε1(Zε(ψε(h)))=0,(\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\psi_{\varepsilon}^{-1})(\psi_{\varepsilon}(h))+d\psi_{\varepsilon}^{-1}(Z_{\varepsilon}(\psi_{\varepsilon}(h)))=0,

which is obtained by applying ddε\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}} to ψε1ψε=Id\psi_{\varepsilon}^{-1}\circ\psi_{\varepsilon}=Id. Therefore, by Theorem 8.5, ψε1Φεφε=τεΦ\psi_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1}\circ\Phi_{\varepsilon}\circ\varphi_{\varepsilon}=\tau_{\varepsilon}\cdot\Phi, as claimed. ∎

Analogously, one can check the following

Theorem 11.5.

Let (ε,(Φε,ϕε),𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},(\Phi_{{\varepsilon}},\phi_{\varepsilon}),{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) be a deformation of (Φ𝒢)({\mathcal{H}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi}}{{\longrightarrow}}{\mathcal{G}}), with {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} compact, and ϕ0\phi_{0} an injective immersion. If the family of associated cocycles (ξε,Xε,ξ𝒢ε)Cdef2(ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon}},-X_{\varepsilon},\xi_{{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}})\in C_{def}^{2}({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) is transgressed by a smooth family of cochains (Yε,α~ε,Zε)Cdef1(ε,Φε,𝒢ε)(Y_{\varepsilon},\tilde{\alpha}_{\varepsilon},Z_{\varepsilon})\in C_{def}^{1}({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}), then the deformation (ε,Φε,𝒢ε)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{{\varepsilon}},{\mathcal{G}}_{\varepsilon}) is strongly trivial.

11.2. Particular cases and relations between (sub)complexes

In view that the complex Cdef(,Φ,𝒢)C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}}) controls the most general type of deformations of the three structures (,Φ,𝒢)({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}}), in this section we consider particular cases of deformations of the triple and their relation with some subcomplexes of Cdef(,Φ,𝒢)C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}}). We begin with the simplest case.

{\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} are fixed

In this case, we get a deformation (,Φε,𝒢)(\mathcal{H},\Phi_{\varepsilon},\mathcal{G}) of a Lie groupoid morphism. This fact is expressed, in cohomological terms, by the injection Cdef(Φ)Cdef(,Φ,𝒢)C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}})

X(0,X,0).X\mapsto(0,-X,0).

Moreover, this map takes the infinitesimal cocycle of Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} to the infinitesimal cocycle of (,Φε,𝒢)({\mathcal{H}},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}). Therefore, in this case, the relevant subcomplex controlling deformations of this type is given by {0}Cdef(Φ){0}\{0\}\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\oplus\{0\} as expected.

𝒢{\mathcal{G}} is fixed

In this case, the relevant subcomplex is Cdef+1()Cdef(Φ){0}C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\oplus\{0\}. In fact, it is not hard to see that a deformation of the form (ε,Φε,𝒢)({\mathcal{H}}_{\varepsilon},\Phi_{\varepsilon},{\mathcal{G}}) is governed by the mapping-cone complex C((Φ))C^{*}((\Phi)_{*}) (see (43)), where one associates the cocycle (ξ,X)Cdef2()Cdef1(Φ)(\xi_{{\mathcal{H}}},-X)\in C^{2}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{1}_{def}(\Phi) to the deformation. Thus the (injective) chain map C(Φ)Cdef(,Φ,𝒢)C^{*}(\Phi_{*})\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{H}},\Phi,{\mathcal{G}})

(45) (c,X)(1)deg(c)(c,X,0)(c,X)\mapsto(-1)^{deg(c)}(c,X,0)

shows that the subcomplex Cdef+1()Cdef(Φ){0}C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\oplus\{0\} controls the deformations of the triple when we fix the groupoid 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

This kind of 𝒢\mathcal{G}-fixed deformations is quite related to what is called deformations of Lie subgroupoids. Indeed, it can be checked that the subcomplex Cdef+1()Cdef(Φ){0}C^{*+1}_{def}({\mathcal{H}})\oplus C^{*}_{def}(\Phi)\oplus\{0\} can be viewed as the complex which controls such a deformations. The details of that will be developed in the future work [9].

12. Morita invariance and Deformation cohomology of generalized morphisms

We now investigate the behaviour of the deformation cohomology under Morita maps of Lie groupoids, show its invariance by Morita morphisms and use it to define a deformation cohomology for generalized morphisms between Lie groupoids. The proof of the invariance results here are just applications of the recent developed concept of VB-Morita maps between VB-groupoids [20].

Proposition 12.1.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism. Assume F:F:{\mathcal{H}}^{\prime}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{H}} is a Morita map. Then Hdef(Φ)Hdef(ΦF)H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi)\cong H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi\circ F).

Proof.

Recall that the deformation complexes of Φ\Phi and ΦF\Phi\circ F are respectively isomorphic to the VB-complexes of the pullback VB-groupoids ΦT𝒢\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}} and FΦT𝒢F^{*}\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}. Then, since FF is a Morita map, then the canonical vector bundle map FΦT𝒢ΦT𝒢F^{*}\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}} insures that such VB-groupoids are VB-Morita equivalent (see Corollary 3.7 of [20]) and thus, by the VB-Morita invariance of the VB-cohomology of [20], we have that Hdef(Φ)HVB(ΦT𝒢)HVB(FΦT𝒢)Hdef(ΦF)H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi)\cong H^{\bullet}_{VB}(\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}})\cong H^{\bullet}_{VB}(F^{*}\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}})\cong H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi\circ F), as claimed.

Proposition 12.2.

Let Φ:𝒢\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} be a Lie groupoid morphism. If F:𝒢𝒢F:{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} is a Morita map, then Hdef(Φ)Hdef(FΦ)H^{\bullet}_{def}(\Phi)\cong H^{\bullet}_{def}(F\circ\Phi).

Proof.

Recall that the complexes computing the deformation cohomology of Φ\Phi and FΦF\circ\Phi are isomorphic, respectively, to the VB-complexes of the two VB-groupoids ΦT𝒢\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}} and ΦFT𝒢\Phi^{*}F^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}, thus we shall prove that the cohomologies of these VB-complexes are isomorphic.

Since FF is a Morita map, it follows that the differential TF:T𝒢T𝒢TF:T{\mathcal{G}}\to T{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} and the canonical bundle map FT𝒢T𝒢F^{*}T{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}\longrightarrow T{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} are VB-Morita maps. Thus, the induced map (TF)!:T𝒢FT𝒢(TF)^{!}:T{\mathcal{G}}\longrightarrow F^{*}T{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime} of the VB-groupoids (over 𝒢\mathcal{G}) turns out to be also a VB-Morita map.

Therefore, Corollary 3.9 in [20] ensures that its dual map

Ψ:=((TF)!):FT𝒢T𝒢\Psi:=((TF)^{!})^{*}:F^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}\longrightarrow T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}

is a VB-Morita map. Hence, finally by taking the pullback by Φ\Phi of these VB-groupoids, one gets the induced VB-Morita map ΦΨ:ΦFT𝒢ΦT𝒢\Phi^{*}\Psi:\Phi^{*}F^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}}^{\prime}\longrightarrow\Phi^{*}T^{*}{\mathcal{G}} which, by the VB-Morita invariance of the VB-cohomology [20], then induces the isomorphism of the indicated VB-cohomologies. ∎

We can use now the results in this Section to define a deformation cohomology for generalized maps which are regarded as the morphisms in the category of differentiable stacks.

12.1. A deformation complex for fractions

In the setting of the theory of localization of categories and calculus of fractions [27], given two Lie groupoids {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}, a fraction Ψ/Φ:𝒢\Psi/\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\longrightarrow{\mathcal{G}} is defined by two maps Φ:𝒦\Phi:{\mathcal{K}}\to{\mathcal{H}} and Ψ:𝒦𝒢\Psi:{\mathcal{K}}\to{\mathcal{G}} where 𝒦{\mathcal{K}} is a third Lie groupoid and Φ\Phi is a Morita morphism. That fraction is often also denoted by ΨΦ1\Psi\Phi^{-1}.

(46) Φ𝒦Ψ𝒢.{\mathcal{H}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Phi}}{{\longleftarrow}}{\mathcal{K}}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle\Psi}}{{\longrightarrow}}{\mathcal{G}}.

Two fraction are said to be equivalent Ψ1/Φ1Ψ2/Φ2\Psi_{1}/\Phi_{1}\cong\Psi_{2}/\Phi_{2} if there exist a third fraction Ψ3/Φ3\Psi_{3}/\Phi_{3} and Morita maps F1:𝒦3𝒦1F_{1}:{\mathcal{K}}_{3}\to{\mathcal{K}}_{1} and F2:𝒦3𝒦2F_{2}:{\mathcal{K}}_{3}\to{\mathcal{K}}_{2} making the below diagram commutative up to isomorphisms of morphisms.

𝒦1\textstyle{{\mathcal{K}}_{1}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ1\scriptstyle{\Phi_{1}}Ψ1\scriptstyle{\Psi_{1}}\textstyle{\mathcal{H}}𝒦3\textstyle{{\mathcal{K}}_{3}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Ψ3\scriptstyle{\Psi_{3}}Φ3\scriptstyle{\Phi_{3}}F1\scriptstyle{F_{1}}F2\scriptstyle{F_{2}}𝒢\textstyle{\mathcal{G}}𝒦2\textstyle{{\mathcal{K}}_{2}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}Φ2\scriptstyle{\Phi_{2}}Ψ2\scriptstyle{\Psi_{2}}

This is indeed an equivalence relation on fractions as can be proved by using weak fibred products ([34], p. 124). The equivalence class of the fraction Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi determines a generalized map Ψ/Φ:𝒢\mathrm{\Psi/\Phi:{\mathcal{H}}\dashrightarrow{\mathcal{G}}}, also known as generalized morphism or stacky map, which can be viewed as a smooth map between the differentiable stacks presented by {\mathcal{H}} and 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} (see [19], Section 6.2).

Given the fraction Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi, there is a map of complexes ΦΨ:Cdef(𝒦)Cdef(Φ)Cdef(Ψ)\Phi_{*}\oplus\Psi_{*}:C_{def}^{*}({\mathcal{K}})\to C_{def}^{*}(\Phi)\oplus C_{def}^{*}(\Psi) induced by the morphisms Φ\Phi and Ψ\Psi. We define the deformation complex of the fraction Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi by the mapping-cone complex of the map ΦΨ\Phi_{*}\oplus\Psi_{*}. That is,

Cdef(Ψ/Φ):=Cdef(Φ)Cdef+1(𝒦)Cdef(Ψ),C_{\mathrm{def}}^{*}(\Psi/\Phi):=C_{\mathrm{def}}^{*}(\Phi)\oplus C_{\mathrm{def}}^{*+1}({\mathcal{K}})\oplus C_{\mathrm{def}}^{*}(\Psi),

with differential δ(a,b,c)=(ΦbδΦa,δ𝒦b,ΨbδΨa)\delta(a,b,c)=(\Phi_{*}b-\delta_{\Phi}a,\;\delta_{{\mathcal{K}}}b,\;\Psi_{*}b-\delta_{\Psi}a).

Remark 12.3.

Notice that this complex can also be defined for any pair of morphisms set as in diagram (46). However the fact that in a fraction the left leg is a Morita map can be used to get an alternative expression of the deformation complex useful for computations.

Equivalent fractions have isomorphic deformation cohomology as can be proven by using the quasi-isomorphisms FF^{*} and FF_{*} of deformation complexes (Propositions 12.1 and 12.2), induced by a Morita map FF which relates two fractions, and by the isomorphism of deformation complexes of isomorphic morphisms (Theorem 4.8). Hence, the deformation complex of a fraction induces a well-defined deformation cohomology for generalized morphisms. We register that fact in the following theorem.

Theorem 12.4.

If Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi and Ψ/Φ\Psi^{\prime}/\Phi^{\prime} are equivalent fractions from \mathcal{H} to 𝒢\mathcal{G}, then their deformation cohomologies Hdef(Ψ/Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi/\Phi) and Hdef(Ψ/Φ)H^{*}_{def}(\Psi^{\prime}/\Phi^{\prime}) are isomorphic.

Thus, the deformation cohomology of a fraction is an algebraic object associated to the stacky map it represents. The deformation cohomology Hdef(Ψ/Φ)H_{def}^{*}(\Psi/\Phi) also turns out to be very involved in the infinitesimal study of the space of generalized maps. For instance, every deformation of a fraction Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi has a corresponding 1-cocycle whose cohomology class should be regarded as the velocity vector at (the class of) Ψ/Φ\Psi/\Phi of the associated path of generalized morphisms. More extended and detailed results will lie on future work.

13. Application: some remarks on deformations of multiplicative forms

In this section we use the deformation complex of morphisms to study deformations of multiplicative forms on Lie groupoids. Also, we characterize trivial defomations of multiplicative forms in cohomological terms. The content of this section is also relevant to develope the theory of deformations of symplectic groupoids as in [8].

Recall that a kk-form ωΩk(𝒢)\omega\in\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}) is called a multiplicative kk-form if it satisfies the multiplicativity condition

(47) mω=pr1ω+pr2ω,m^{*}\omega=pr_{1}^{*}\omega+pr_{2}^{*}\omega,

where pri,m:𝒢(2)𝒢pr_{i},\ m:{\mathcal{G}}^{(2)}\rightarrow{\mathcal{G}} are the canonical projections and multiplication of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. A map
ω¯:kT𝒢×I\overline{\omega}:\bigoplus^{k}T\mathcal{G}\times I\to\mathbb{R} is called a smooth family of multiplicative kk-forms if, for every ε{\varepsilon}, ωε:=ω¯(,ε)\omega_{\varepsilon}:=\overline{\omega}(\cdot,{\varepsilon}) is a multiplicative kk-form. We say that a smooth family ωεΩk(𝒢)\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}) of multiplicative kk-forms is a deformation of ω\omega if ω0=ω\omega_{0}=\omega.

We consider first the particular case of multiplicative symplectic 2-forms on 𝒢\mathcal{G} (Proposition 13.1 below), then we will generalize the situation to multiplicative kk-forms. A more advanced study of the case of multiplicative symplectic 2-forms is made in [8] where we consider also a simultaneous deformation of the underlying Lie groupoid and a relation of its deformation cohomology to the Bott-Shulmann-Stasheff complex. Recall that the classical Moser’s theorem of symplectic geometry deals with symplectic 2-forms on a differentiable manifold. This theorem says that a smooth family ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} of symplectic forms on a manifold MM is recovered as the pullback Fεω0F_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega_{0} by a family of diffeomorphisms FεF_{\varepsilon} of the symplectic form at time zero if, and only if, there exists a smooth family αεΩ1(M)\alpha_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{1}(M) of 1-forms such that

(48) ddεωε=ddRαε,for every ε.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}=d_{dR}\alpha_{\varepsilon},\ \text{for every }{\varepsilon}.

The following proposition formulates an analogous result in the context of Lie groupoids, where instead we consider the multiplicative de Rham complex (Ωmult(𝒢),ddR)(\Omega_{mult}^{*}(\mathcal{G}),d_{dR}) of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, whose elements are multiplicative forms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Proposition 13.1.

Let (𝒢,ω)(\mathcal{G},\omega) be a compact symplectic groupoid, and assume that ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} is a deformation of ω\omega. Then, ωε=Fεω\omega_{\varepsilon}=F_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega for a smooth family of groupoid automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, with F0=Id𝒢F_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}}, if and only if the family of cocycles ddεωεΩmult2(𝒢)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{2}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}) is smoothly exact in (Ωmult(𝒢),ddR)(\Omega_{mult}^{*}(\mathcal{G}),d_{dR}).

Proof.

This proof is just a multiplicative version of the proof of the classical Moser theorem. In order to prove it, we notice that the multiplicative symplectic 2-form ω\omega yields an isomorphism between the space of multiplicative 1-forms Ωmult1(𝒢)\Omega^{1}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}) and the space of multiplicative vector fields 𝔛mult(𝒢)Zdef1(𝒢)\mathfrak{X}_{mult}(\mathcal{G})\cong Z^{1}_{def}(\mathcal{G}). Therefore the time dependent flow FεF_{\varepsilon} of the transgressing family XεX_{\varepsilon} of vector fields will be given by a family of automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G} starting at the identity Id𝒢Id_{\mathcal{G}}. ∎

Remark 13.2.

We can express equivalently the smooth exactness of ddεωεΩmult2(𝒢)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{2}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}) by saying that ddεωε\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon} has a smooth preimage by ddRd_{dR} in Ωmult1(𝒢)\Omega^{1}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}). That is, saying that there exists a smooth family αεΩmult1(M)\alpha_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{1}_{mult}(M) such that ddεωε=ddRαε,\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}=d_{dR}\alpha_{\varepsilon}, for every ε{\varepsilon}, which is the same condition of equation (48).

The following example shows that the classical Moser theorem is obtained as an application of the previous proposition to the pair groupoid.

Example 13.3.

Let ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} be a smooth family of symplectic structures on a compact manifold MM, and consider the induced family of symplectic groupoids (Pair(M),ω~ε)(\mathrm{Pair}(M),\tilde{\omega}_{\varepsilon}), where ω~ε=pr1ωεpr2ωε\tilde{\omega}_{\varepsilon}=pr_{1}^{*}\omega_{\varepsilon}-pr_{2}^{*}\omega_{\varepsilon}. Thus, since ω~ε\tilde{\omega}_{\varepsilon} is smoothly exact in Ωmult(Pair(M))\Omega_{mult}^{*}(\mathrm{Pair}(M)) if and only if ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} is smoothly exact in Ω(M)\Omega^{*}(M), and the automorphisms of Pair(M)\mathrm{Pair}(M) are of the form F=f×fF=f\times f, where fDiff(M)f\in\mathrm{Diff}(M), it follows that the previous proposition reduces to the classical Moser’s theorem in this case.

Next we pass to the general case of multiplicative kk-forms on the groupoid 𝒢\mathcal{G}. A multiplicative kk-form ω\omega can also be viewed as the morphism of Lie groupoids

p𝒢kT𝒢\textstyle{\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}ω^\scriptstyle{\hat{\omega}}\textstyle{\mathbb{R}\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}pMkTM\textstyle{\bigoplus_{p_{M}}^{k}TM\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces\ignorespaces}\textstyle{*}

which is kk-linear and skewsymmetric in the sense that ω^:p𝒢kT𝒢\hat{\omega}:\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}\to\mathbb{R} is kk-linear with respect to the linear structure of p𝒢kT𝒢\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}}}^{k}T\mathcal{G} over 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. With this viewpoint, a smooth family of skew-symmetric and kk-linear Lie groupoid morphisms ω^ε:kT𝒢\hat{\omega}_{\varepsilon}:\bigoplus^{k}T\mathcal{G}\to\mathbb{R} is called a deformation of the multiplicative kk-form ω0Ωk(𝒢)\omega_{0}\in\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}).

From the cohomological perspective, the skew-symmetry and kk-linearity of the morphism ω^\hat{\omega} translate to skew-symmetric and kk-linear deformation cochains in Cdef(ω^)C^{*}_{def}(\hat{\omega}) as described below.

Definition 13.1.

The deformation complex of a multiplicative kk-form ωΩmultk(𝒢)\omega\in\Omega^{k}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}) consists of the skew-symmetric and kk-linear cochains of Cdef(ω^)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\hat{\omega}). We denote by Cdef(ω)C^{*}_{def}(\omega) such a subcomplex of deformation cochains.

Explicitly, the deformation complex Cdef(ω)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega) can be described as follows. Consider the natural identification p𝒢(l)kT𝒢(l)(p𝒢kT𝒢)(l)\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}\cong(\bigoplus_{p_{\mathcal{G}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})^{(l)}, where p𝒢(l):T𝒢(l)𝒢(l)p_{\mathcal{G}^{(l)}}:T{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}\to\mathcal{G}^{(l)} and p𝒢:T𝒢𝒢p_{\mathcal{G}}:T{\mathcal{G}}\to\mathcal{G} are the projections of the respective tangent bundles. Thus, the elements cc of Cdef(ω)C^{*}_{def}(\omega) are given by those elements cc in Cdef(ω^)C^{*}_{def}(\hat{\omega}) which turn the composition

(49) p𝒢(l)kT𝒢(l)(p𝒢kT𝒢)(l)cTpr2\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}\cong(\bigoplus_{p_{\mathcal{G}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})^{(l)}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle c}}{{\longrightarrow}}T\mathbb{R}\cong\mathbb{R}\oplus\mathbb{R}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle pr_{2}}}{{\longrightarrow}}\mathbb{R}

a kk-linear and skew-symmetric map. Along with the restriction δω\delta_{\omega} of the deformation differential δω^\delta_{\hat{\omega}} of Cdef(ω^)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\hat{\omega}), (Cdef(ω),δω)(C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega),\delta_{\omega}) becomes indeed a subcomplex: the deformation complex of ω\omega.

Remark 13.4.

Considering the identification of (p𝒢kT𝒢)(l)(\bigoplus_{p_{\mathcal{G}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})^{(l)} with p𝒢(l)kT𝒢(l)\bigoplus_{p_{{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}^{(l)} and the composition

(p𝒢kT𝒢)(l)cTpr2,(\bigoplus_{p_{\mathcal{G}}}^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})^{(l)}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle c}}{{\longrightarrow}}T\mathbb{R}\cong\mathbb{R}\oplus\mathbb{R}\stackrel{{\scriptstyle pr_{2}}}{{\longrightarrow}}\mathbb{R},

the elements of the complex Cdef(ω)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega) can be regarded as the elements of the subcomplex Cklin,sk(kT𝒢)C^{\bullet}_{k\mathrm{-lin},\mathrm{sk}}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}) of Cdiff(kT𝒢)C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{diff}}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}) consisting of fiberwise kk-linear and skew-symmetric differentiable cochains of Cdiff(kT𝒢)C^{\bullet}_{\mathrm{diff}}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}). Moreover, from a straightforward computation, one also gets the correspondence between the differentials of these complexes.

The following proposition shows that this deformation complex is isomorphic to one that only depends on the simplicial structure of 𝒢\mathcal{G} and not of T𝒢T\mathcal{G} or ω\omega explicitly.

Proposition 13.5.

Given any multiplicative kk-form ωΩmultk(𝒢)\omega\in\Omega^{k}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}), the deformation complex (Cdef(ω),δω)(C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega),\delta_{\omega}) is isomorphic to (Ωk(𝒢()),δ)(\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}^{(\bullet)}),\delta); where δ\delta is the differential induced from the simplicial structure of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

Proof.

The correspondence between the cochains is straightforward from the description of the elements of Cdef(ω)C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega) in expression (49). And the correspondence between the differentials follows directly from the identification of the deformation differential δω\delta_{\omega} with the simplicial differential of the differentiable subcomplex Cklin,sk(kT𝒢)C^{\bullet}_{k-lin,\ sk}(\bigoplus^{k}T\mathcal{G}) of Remark 13.4 above, which in turn identifies with the simplicial differential of the simplicial complex of kk-forms over the nerve of 𝒢\mathcal{G}.

With this setting, a deformation ω^ε\hat{\omega}_{\varepsilon} of ω\omega by multiplicative forms on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} determines:

  1. (1)

    a smooth family Xε=ddεω^εX_{\varepsilon}=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\hat{\omega}_{\varepsilon} of 1-cocycles in Cklin,sk(kT𝒢)Cdef(ω)C^{\bullet}_{k\mathrm{-lin},\ \mathrm{sk}}(\oplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})\cong C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega) (Proposition 8.1);

  2. (2)

    a family of cochain maps

    (ω^ε):Cdef(kT𝒢)Cdef(ω)Ωk(𝒢()),(\hat{\omega}_{\varepsilon})_{*}:C_{def}^{\bullet}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}})\to C^{\bullet}_{def}(\omega)\cong\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}^{(\bullet)}),

    which follows from Remark 4.1.

Notice, however, that the cocycle condition (1)(1) also follows by taking directly the derivative ddε\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}} of the multiplicativity condition of ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} (equation (47)), obtaining that ddεωεΩmultk(𝒢)Zdef1(ω)\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{k}_{mult}({\mathcal{G}})\cong Z^{1}_{def}(\omega).

We define now a map of complexes 𝒯:Cdef(𝒢)Cdef(kT𝒢)\mathcal{T}:C_{def}^{*}({\mathcal{G}})\to C_{def}^{*}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}}) which, composing with the map (ω^ε)(\hat{\omega}_{{\varepsilon}})_{*} above, is a relevant element in the statement of the theorem below that generalizes Proposition 13.1 to kk-forms. Consider the tangent lift T:Cdef(𝒢)Cdef(T𝒢)T:C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\longrightarrow C^{*}_{def}(T{\mathcal{G}}) of deformation cochains which, as checked in [29], turns out to be a cochain map. For cCdefk(𝒢)c\in C^{k}_{def}({\mathcal{G}}) it is defined by

Tc:=J𝒢dc,Tc:=J_{\mathcal{G}}\circ dc,

where J𝒢:T(T𝒢)T(T𝒢)J_{\mathcal{G}}:T(T{\mathcal{G}})\rightarrow T(T{\mathcal{G}}) is the involution map of the double tangent bundle of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. We thus define 𝒯\mathcal{T} as the map kT\oplus^{k}T. Explicitly,

kT:Cdef(𝒢)Cdef(kT𝒢);kT(c):=k(Tc).\oplus^{k}T:C^{*}_{def}({\mathcal{G}})\rightarrow C^{*}_{def}(\bigoplus^{k}T{\mathcal{G}});\ \ \oplus^{k}T(c):=\oplus^{k}(Tc).
Theorem 13.6.

Let ωεΩk(𝒢)\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{k}({\mathcal{G}}) be a deformation of the multiplicative kk-form ωΩk(𝒢)\omega\in\Omega^{k}({\mathcal{G}}). Assume that 𝒢\mathcal{G} is compact. Then, ωε=Φεω\omega_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega for a smooth family Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} of groupoid automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, with Φ0=Id𝒢\Phi_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}}, if and only if the family of multiplicative kk-forms Xε:=ddεωεΩmultk(𝒢)X_{\varepsilon}:=\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{k}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}) has a smooth pre-image in Zdef1(𝒢)Z_{def}^{1}(\mathcal{G}) by the map (ω^ε)𝒯:Zdef1(𝒢)Z1(Ωk(𝒢()))=Ωmultk(𝒢)(\hat{\omega}_{\varepsilon})_{*}\circ\mathcal{T}:Z_{def}^{1}(\mathcal{G})\to Z^{1}(\Omega^{k}(\mathcal{G}^{(\bullet)}))=\Omega^{k}_{mult}(\mathcal{G}).

Proof.

The smoothness of the pre-images of Xλ-X_{\lambda} implies

Xλ=(ωλ)kT(Zλ),-X_{\lambda}=(\omega_{\lambda})_{*}\circ\oplus^{k}T(Z_{\lambda}),

for some smooth family ZεZ_{\varepsilon} of deformation 1-cocycles (i.e. multiplicative vector fields) of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}. Thus, let denote by FεF_{\varepsilon} the flow of the time-dependent vector field {Zε}ε\{Z_{\varepsilon}\}_{\varepsilon} (starting at time zero) covering fεf_{\varepsilon}, then we have

ddε|ε=λωε\displaystyle-\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\omega_{\varepsilon} =(dωλ)(kT(ddε|ε=λ(FεFλ1)))\displaystyle=(d\omega_{\lambda})\left(\oplus^{k}T(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(F_{\varepsilon}\circ F_{\lambda}^{-1}))\right)
=(dωλ)(ddε|ε=λ(kTFεkT(Fλ1))).\displaystyle=(d\omega_{\lambda})\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\left(\oplus^{k}TF_{\varepsilon}\circ\oplus^{k}T(F_{\lambda}^{-1})\right)\right).

Equivalently,

ddε|ε=λωεkTFλ=(dωλ)(ddε|ε=λkTFε).-\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\omega_{\varepsilon}\circ\oplus^{k}TF_{\lambda}=(d\omega_{\lambda})\left(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\oplus^{k}TF_{\varepsilon}\right).

In other words,

ddε|ε=λ(Fεωε)\displaystyle\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}(F_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega_{\varepsilon}) =Fλ(ddε|ε=λωε)+ddε|ε=λFεωλ\displaystyle=F_{\lambda}^{*}(\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}\omega_{\varepsilon})+\left.\frac{d}{d{\varepsilon}}\right|_{{\varepsilon}={\lambda}}F_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega_{\lambda}
=0.\displaystyle=0.

This says that

ωε=Φεω,\omega_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega,

where Φε=Fε1\Phi_{\varepsilon}=F_{{\varepsilon}}^{-1} is a smooth family of automorphisms of 𝒢{\mathcal{G}} due to the multiplicativity of the time-dependent vector field ZεZ_{\varepsilon}.

Remark 13.7.

The previous Theorem reduces to the Proposition 13.1 when ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} is taken as a family of multiplicative and symplectic 2-forms on 𝒢{\mathcal{G}}.

The following theorem now tells us about the meaning of the smooth cohomological triviality of the family of 1-cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} in terms of the deformation ωε\omega_{\varepsilon}. Its proof is similar to the previous one. This fact will be approached a bit more for the particular case of symplectic groupoids in [8].

Theorem 13.8.

Let ωεΩk(𝒢)\omega_{\varepsilon}\in\Omega^{k}({\mathcal{G}}) be a deformation of the multiplicative kk-form ωΩk(𝒢)\omega\in\Omega^{k}({\mathcal{G}}). Assume that the groupoid 𝒢M\mathcal{G}\rightrightarrows M is compact. Then, smooth exactness of the familiy of cocycles XεX_{\varepsilon} amounts to the fact that the deformation ωε\omega_{\varepsilon} is of the form ωε=Φεω+sβεtβε\omega_{\varepsilon}=\Phi_{\varepsilon}^{*}\omega+s^{*}\beta_{\varepsilon}-t^{*}\beta_{\varepsilon}; where Φε\Phi_{\varepsilon} is a smooth family of groupoid automorphisms of 𝒢\mathcal{G}, with Φ0=Id𝒢\Phi_{0}=Id_{\mathcal{G}} and βε\beta_{\varepsilon} is a smooth family of 2-forms on MM with β0=0\beta_{0}=0.

References

  • [1] Alaoui, A. E. K., Guasp, G., and Nicolau, M. On deformations of transversely homogeneous foliations. Topology 40, 6 (2001), 1363–1393.
  • [2] Blaom, A. Geometric structures as deformed infinitesimal symmetries. Transactions of the American Mathematical Society 358, 8 (2006), 3651–3671.
  • [3] Bunk, S. A method of deforming G-structures. Journal of Geometry and Physics 96 (2015), 72–80.
  • [4] Bursztyn, H., Cabrera, A., and del Hoyo, M. Vector bundles over Lie groupoids and algebroids. Advances in Mathematics 290 (2016), 163–207.
  • [5] Bursztyn, H., Crainic, M., Weinstein, A., Zhu, C., et al. Integration of twisted Dirac brackets. Duke Mathematical Journal 123, 3 (2004), 549–607.
  • [6] Cabrera, A. Generating functions for local symplectic groupoids and non-perturbative semiclassical quantization. Communications in Mathematical Physics 395, 3 (2022), 1243–1296.
  • [7] Cabrera, A., and Drummond, T. Van est isomorphism for homogeneous cochains. Pacific Journal of Mathematics 287, 2 (2017), 297–336.
  • [8] Cárdenas, C. C., Mestre, J. N., and Struchiner, I. Deformations of symplectic groupoids. arXiv preprint arXiv:2103.14008 (2021).
  • [9] Cárdenas, C. C., and Struchiner, I. On deformations of Lie subgroupoids. Work in progress.
  • [10] Cárdenas, C. C., and Struchiner, I. Stability of Lie group homomorphisms and Lie subgroups. Journal of Pure and Applied Algebra 224, 3 (2020), 1280–1296.
  • [11] Coste, A., Dazord, P., and Weinstein, A. Groupoϊdes symplectiques. Publ. Dept. Math. Lyon 2, A (1987), 1–62.
  • [12] Crainic, M., and Fernandes, R. L. Integrability of Poisson brackets. Journal of Differential Geometry 66, 1 (2004), 71–137.
  • [13] Crainic, M., and Fernandes, R. L. Lectures on integrability of Lie brackets. Geom. Topol. Monogr 17 (2011), 1–107.
  • [14] Crainic, M., Fernandes, R. L., and Mărcuţ, I. Lectures on Poisson geometry, vol. 217. American Mathematical Soc., 2021.
  • [15] Crainic, M., Mestre, J. N., and Struchiner, I. Deformations of lie groupoids. International Mathematics Research Notices 2020, 21 (2020), 7662–7746.
  • [16] Crainic, M., and Moerdijk, I. Deformations of Lie brackets: cohomological aspects. Journal of the European Mathematical Society 10, 4 (2008), 1037–1059.
  • [17] Del Hoyo, M., and Fernandes, R. L. On deformations of compact foliations. Proceedings of the American Mathematical Society 147, 10 (2019), 4555–4561.
  • [18] del Hoyo, M., and Fernandes, R. L. Riemannian metrics on differentiable stacks. Mathematische Zeitschrift 292, 1-2 (2019), 103–132.
  • [19] del Hoyo, M., and Fernandes, R. L. Riemannian metrics on differentiable stacks. Mathematische Zeitschrift 292, 1-2 (2019), 103–132.
  • [20] del Hoyo, M., and Ortiz, C. Morita equivalences of vector bundles. International Mathematics Research Notices 2020, 14 (2020), 4395–4432.
  • [21] Gerstenhaber, M. On the deformation of rings and algebras. Annals of Mathematics (1964), 59–103.
  • [22] Geudens, S., Tortorella, A. G., and Zambon, M. Deformations of symplectic foliations. Advances in Mathematics 404 (2022), 108445.
  • [23] Golubitsky, M., and Guillemin, V. Stable mappings and their singularities, vol. 14. Springer Science & Business Media, 2012.
  • [24] Gracia-Saz, A., and Mehta, R. A. VB-groupoids and representation theory of Lie groupoids. Journal of Symplectic Geometry 15, 3 (2017), 741–783.
  • [25] Griffiths, P. A. Deformations of G-structures. Mathematische Annalen 155, 4 (1964), 292–315.
  • [26] Guillemin, V., and Sternberg, S. Deformation theory of pseudogroup structures. No. 64. American Mathematical Soc., 1966.
  • [27] Kashiwara, M., and Schapira, P. Categories and Sheaves. Springer Berlin Heidelberg, 2006.
  • [28] Kodaira, K., and Spencer, D. C. On deformations of complex analytic structures, i. Annals of Mathematics (1958), 328–401.
  • [29] La Pastina, P. P., and Vitagliano, L. Deformations of vector bundles over Lie groupoids. Revista Matemática Complutense (2022), 1–39.
  • [30] Li-Bland, D., and Ševera, P. Quasi-Hamiltonian groupoids and multiplicative manin pairs. International Mathematics Research Notices 2011, 10 (2011), 2295–2350.
  • [31] Mackenzie, K., and Xu, P. Classical lifting processes and multiplicative vector fields. arXiv preprint dg-ga/9710030 (1997).
  • [32] Mackenzie, K. C. General theory of Lie groupoids and Lie algebroids, vol. 213. Cambridge University Press, 2005.
  • [33] McDuff, D., and Salamon, D. Introduction to symplectic topology.
  • [34] Moerdijk, I., and Mrcun, J. Introduction to foliations and Lie groupoids, vol. 91. Cambridge University Press, 2003.
  • [35] Nijenhuis, A., and Richardson Jr, R. W. Deformations of homomorphisms of Lie groups and Lie algebras. Bulletin of the American Mathematical Society 73, 1 (1967), 175–179.
  • [36] Oh, Y.-G., and Park, J.-S. Deformations of coisotropic submanifolds and strong homotopy Lie algebroids. Inventiones mathematicae 161, 2 (2005), 287–360.
  • [37] Ortiz, C., and Valencia, F. Morse theory on Lie groupoids. arXiv preprint arXiv:2207.07594 (2022).
  • [38] Richardson Jr, R., et al. Deformations of subalgebras of Lie algebras. Journal of Differential Geometry 3, 3-4 (1969), 289–308.
  • [39] Schätz, F., and Zambon, M. Deformations of coisotropic submanifolds for fibrewise entire Poisson structures. Letters in Mathematical Physics 103, 7 (2013), 777–791.

Universidade Federal Fluminense, Instituto de Matemática e Estatίstica, Rua Prof. Marcos Waldemar de Freitas Reis, S/n, 24210-201, Niterói, RJ, Brazil

E-mail address, C. C. Cárdenas: ccardenascrist@gmail.com